HORAE SYNOPTICAE HAWKINS HENRY FROWDE, M.A. PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK TORONTO AND MELBOURNE HORAE SYNOPTICAE CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE STUDY OF THE SYNOPTIC PROBLEM BY THE REV. SIR JOHN C. HAWKINS, BART., M.A., D.D. HONORARY CANON OF ST. ALBAN3 SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND SUPPLEMENTED OXFORD AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 1909 OXFORD PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS BY HORACE HART, M.A. PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION THE origin, mode of composition, and mutual relations of the three Synoptic Gospels form so obscure and so complex a subject of inquiry that it has come to be generally known as the * Synoptic Problem '. Among the many modern attempts to deal with it, this volume has a limited and merely preparatory purpose, which I have tried to indicate upon its title-page. It is called by the plural name ' Horae Synopticae ', because, while it is the outcome of a good many hours spent in examination of the Synoptic Gospels and in tabulation of the results thus obtained, those results are presented separately and almost indepen- dently in the successive sections of the book, no attempt being made to combine them as foundations or supports of any system or theory. And the sub-title is ' Contributions to the study' rather than to the solution ( of the Synoptic Problem ', because I have only been trying to help in that preliminary process of collecting and sifting materials which must be carried much further than it has yet been before we can be ready for the solution of the Problem or, as I would rather express it, of such parts of it as are not now insoluble. For while it seems to me, on the one hand, that there are some aspects of it as to which we are not likely to advance beyond statements of conflicting probabilities, unless there are some fresh dis- coveries of documents in Egypt or elsewhere, on the other hand I believe that not a few conclusions and those of the most important kinds are likely to be made so clear 240097 vi Preface to the First Edition and so practically certain by the patient and careful investi- gations of the language of the Gospels which are now being carried on, that before very long they will meet with general acceptance. 1 My object, then, has been to collect and to exhibit facts with as small an admixture of theory as possible. In Part I there is, I think, scarcely anything that can be called theory. In Parts II and III, however, it was found that the occasional use of a ' working hypothesis ' could not be dispensed with (as on p. in 2 ); and I have several times (as on pp. 81, 128, 153, 162, 185, 212, and in the Conclud- ing Summary) briefly stated or implied some inferences, without which the reason for introducing the facts and figures could hardly have been made clear. But I have suppressed, or at least reserved for another opportunity, some more detailed hypotheses and conjectures which had occurred to me, or had been recalled to me, in the course of the preparation of these pages. For some of them I think I could have claimed a fair amount of probability, and they might have made the book more interesting ; but they would certainly have obscured its designed character of being mainly a collection of materials. It may be said, perhaps, that these materials are not of a very solid and trustworthy nature, or at least that they are of such a kind that their value is likely to be over- rated, especially by the compiler of them. For they are to a large extent statistical : and statistics are proverbially misleading, and proverbially liable to be made to ' prove anything' that is wished. No doubt there is this danger, 1 Professor Sanday speaks hopefully of the prospects of solution, both in his important supplement to the article ( Gospels ' in Smith's Diet, of the Bible, ed. 2, p. 1228, and in Inspiration, p. 282. 2 [These references are now made to the pages of the second edition.] Preface to the First Edition vii however cautious and free from prejudice the compiler may try to be : and he should remember that he is particularly exposed to it when the field from which the statistics are collected is so small as it is in the present case. I can only say, first, that I have done my best to guard against this danger in various ways, and especially by bracketing words on which stress should not be laid, although their insertion in the lists was necessary (cf. pp. 2, 178). Secondly, I would say that however misleading statistics may be, con- jectures unsupported by statistics are likely to be still more so, unless they are supported by evidence of other kinds, such as contemporary, or nearly contemporary, historical testimonies : and as to the Synoptic Gospels such evidence is very slight, being almost limited to St. Luke's Preface (i. I-4) 1 and to the well-known passage of Papias about Mark as the interpreter of Peter, and Matthew as the com- poser of the Logia. 2 Thirdly, some confidence in the statistical method, as here used, may be inspired by the general accordance of its results with such intimations as we gather from the words of St. Luke and of Papias, and (I venture to add, though the matter is too wide and too vague for proof, or even for discussion, here) with the general probabilities of the case, as they are suggested to us through such other means as we have at our command. 3 If I seem to have devoted a disproportionately large amount of space to some apparently minor matters, such as the use of the Historic Present 4 and of Conjunctions 5 1 Of course these verses liave been abundantly and minutely discussed by many commentators and others, as their unique importance and interest demand. A fresh and interesting examination of them will be found in Blass, Philology of the Gospels, pp. 7-20 [also, since then, in Expos. Times, xviii. 395]. 2 The passage is given below, p. xiii. 3 See e.g. the remark on the use of the Gospels in sub-apostolic times, p. 218, paragraph D. 4 pp. 143 ff. 6 pp. 137, 150 ff. viii Preface to the First Edition in St. Mark, and the comparatively slight differences between the language of St. Luke's Gospel and of Acts, 1 it is because I wished to dwell especially on those points which, so far as I knew, had either been insufficiently worked out, or at least had not been put before English students in a distinct and easily available form. On the other hand, some important departments of the Synoptic Problem such as the number and nature of the sources used by St. Luke only have been passed over, merely because I could not see that any light would be thrown upon them by such statistics and observations as I had been able to put together. For of course the volume is far too small to make any pretensions to completeness, or to due proportion of contents, even as a collection of materials for students. Most of the following materials were originally drawn up for my own use. But Professor Sanday, having seen some of my papers, advised and encouraged the publication of them, as being likely to be useful to others who are working at the same subject. He has also very kindly read the proof-sheets of the book, and has made many helpful and valuable suggestions, for which I am extremely grateful. My study of the language of the Gospels has generally been independent ; but of course I have sometimes cor- rected or supplemented my own results by those of other writers. In so doing, I think my chief obligations have been to Dr. E. A. Abbott's well-known article ' Gospels ' in Enc. Brit., vol. x, and to Dr. Plummer's Commentary on St. Luke, which enabled me to add about fifteen entries to the list of 'words and phrases characteristic of that Gospel. Preface to the First Edition ix In such lists as that to which I have just referred, there are probably many deficiencies and imperfections ; but perhaps other workers may be able to make use of them as foundations of more complete lists, or, if they are unwilling to do so themselves, may help me to do so by sending me notices of errors and omissions. J. C. H. KELSTON LODGE, OXFORD, October, 1898. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION VERY few prefatory words are required. For, although many more hours have been spent over the Synoptic Gospels with a view to this edition, it has not been with the intention of working in any fresh directions, but only with the hope of supplying some of the ' deficiencies ' and removing some of the * imperfections ' which, in the last words of the preceding preface, were spoken of as likely to be found in a work of this kind. Numerous small supplements have been made to many of the lists, and especially to those concerned with the characteristics of the three Synoptists, in order to render them as nearly complete as possible. I could not find more than a very few modifications or withdrawals that I ought to make, the only two of any importance being those referred to on pages 174 f. and 214. The Section (Pt. II, Sect. V) on the chief non-Marcan source used in the First and Third Gospels has been very x Preface to the Second Edition largely rewritten, not because of much change of opinion on my own part, but in order to avoid the appearance of a claim to more certainty than has yet been reached on this subject. I have only found occasions for a few references to the illustrations of the KOI^TJ Greek of the New Testament and LXX which are being drawn from he Papyri. No doubt many more will be suggested by such a work as the Lexicon which is promised by Drs. J. H. Moulton and G. Milligan, and some of the materials for which they are gradually publishing in the Expositor. J. C. H. KELSTON LODGE, OXFORD, September, 1909. TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE PRELIMINARY NOTICES AND EXPLANATIONS .... xiii PART I WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF EACH OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS SECTION I. St. Matthew's Gospel 3 II. St. Mark's Gospel . 10 III. St. Luke's Gospel 15 IV. General remarks on the Characteristic Words and Phrases 26 APPENDIX I TO PART I : Two Subsidiary Lists of Lucan Characteristics 27 APPENDIX II TO PART I : References to those Words and Phrases which do not stand consecutively in a Concordance 30 ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART I 51 PART II INDICATIONS OF SOURCES SECTION I. Identities in language 54 II. Words differently applied 67 III. Transpositions of the Order of Words and Sentences 77 IV. Doublets 80 APPENDIX TO SECTION IV: 'He that hath ears, &c.' 106 V. The Source largely used by Matthew and Luke, apart from Mark 107 PART III FURTHER STATISTICS AND OBSERVATIONS BEARING ON THE ORIGIN AND COMPOSITION OF EACH GOSPEL A. ST. MARK'S GOSPEL 114-153 SECTION I. Passages which may have been omitted or altered as being liable to be misunderstood, or to give offence, or to suggest difficulties . . . 117 xii Table of Contents PAGE SECTION II. Enlargements of the narrative, which add nothing to the information conveyed by it, because they are expressed again, or are directly involved, in the Context 125 III. Minor Additions to the narrative . . . .127 IV. Rude, harsh, obscure, or unusual words or expres- sions, which may therefore have been omitted or replaced by others . , . . . . 131 V. Duplicate expressions in Mark, of which one or both of the other Synoptists use one part, or its equivalent . ... . . . . 139 VI. The Historic Present in Mark . . . .143 ,, VII. The Conjunction Km preferred to Ae in Mark . 150 B. ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL . . ^ ,/ ; . . . 154-173 SECTION I. The Quotations from the Old Testament . . 154 II. The Shortening of Narratives in Matthew . . 158 III. Signs of Compilation in Matthew . : . . 161 ,) IV. Traces of Numerical Arrangements in Matthew . 163 ,, V. The transference and repetition of Formulas, especially in Matthew . . . * .168 C. ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL . . . . . . ^ ' . 174-197 DIVISION I. On the Linguistic Relations between St. Luke's Gospel and Acts . 174-193 SECTION I. The linguistic similarity between Luke and Acts . 174 II. Differences between the language of Luke and Acts .177 III. Special consideration of the ' We '-Sections of Acts in relation to Luke 182 IV. Subsidiary notice of the similarity between the language of Luke and of the Pauline Epistles . 189 Note on the relation between Luke, Acts, Paul, and Hebrews 192 DIVISION II. On the Smaller Additions in St. Luke's Gospel 194-197 APPENDIX A TO PART III. The Synoptists and the Septuagint 198 B ,, The alterations and small additions in which Matthew and Luke agree against Mark . . . . 208 ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART III . . .-. ... . 212 CONCLUDING SUMMARY . .216 INDEX . . 221 PRELIMINARY NOTICES AND EXPLANATIONS AN 'Introduction' of the usual kind is needless here, since the Table of Contents sufficiently indicates the nature of the separate ' Contributions to the study of the Synoptic Problem ' which the following pages contain. But the attention of those who use the book is called to these notices and explanations : 1. The passage of Papias, which contains considerably the earliest external mention of any of the writers whose names are connected with our Gospels, is so often alluded to that it will be well to print it here for convenience of reference. Both text and translation are taken from Bishop Lightfoot's Apostolic Fathers (i vol. 1891), pp. 517, 529. Kal rouro 6 Trpeo-^repos And the Elder said this also : Mark having become apKOs uez> ep/^ewrj? the interpreter of Peter, yei/o/xez/oy, ova fyurcjjxo- wrote down accurately , ~ v , , everything that he remem- GLKpLpas eypayfV) ov bered, 1 without however re- rdgti, ra VTTO TOV Xptoroi; cording in order what was r) \cxptvra ri -npa^vra. o^re either said or done b Y Christ. For neither did he hear the yap riKOVi7i>, , 6s 717)6? ra? , woio/Aevos ,*v * , , oxrre ovoer rj/xapre Map/coy, ovrus (via ypttyas a>s Awe/unj- fjLovV(Tv. hoy yap e7rot?i(7aro y TTpOVOiaV, TOV IM]V &V 7]KOV(T wapoXiireii; $ ^o-acr^af rt ev avrots . . . Mar0atos plv ovv rA Xo> (attended) Peter, who adapted Ws instructions to the needs (of his hearers), but had no design of giving a connected account of the Lord's oracles. 1 So then Mark made no mis- take, while he thus wrote down some things as he remembered them ; for he made it his one care not to omit anything that he heard, or to set down any f a j se statement therein ... So then Matthew composed the oracles in the Hebrew Ian- o)s ?Jz; Swaroy eKaoroj. preted them as he could. The passage is preserved for us by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl., iii. 39), and his context makes it probable that the Presbyter John was the * Elder ' on whose authority Papias gives his notice of Mark, and presumably of Matthew also. The approximate date of the work of Papias may be given as A.D. 130. 2. Nearly all the following tables were drawn up before the publication of Moulton and Geden's Concordance. But they have been revised and checked with the help of it, and it is adopted as the standard as to orthography, order of words, &c. Where no other Concordance is named, it is assumed that this one will be in use : but in a few instances there will be found a reference to Bruder (ed. 1888), because in those cases his arrangement brings out more fully or clearly or conveniently the usage to which attention is being called. 1 Or 'sayings', if with Lightfoot we read \6ycuv, and not \oyicw. Preliminary Notices and Explanations xv The text used is Westcott and Hort's (WH), with occasional reference to Tischendorfs (Tisch, or T) and to that of the English Revisers (R). Various readings are noticed only in the most important cases, as where WH's margin (mg) agrees with Tisch against their text, or where the matter in hand is directly affected by the variants. Attention has been also called to a few specially interesting Western readings, and some references made to the Sinaitic-Syriac version. 4. In the Tables on pp. 4-29 'Acts' and * Paul' are placed in the columns next after ' Luke ', in order to draw attention throughout to the strong affinities which exist between the members of the Lucano-Pauline group of writings, and upon which more is said on pp. 189 ff. 5. When 'John' is referred to, or placed at the head of a column, only the fourth Gospel is meant: for it is important sometimes to bring out a similarity or contrast between this and the other historical books. Therefore the three Epistles of St. John, as well as the Apocalypse, had to be placed in the column headed ' Rest of N. T.' But no expression of opinion as to the authorship of any of those books is thus intended. Again, it has been found convenient to class thirteen Epistles under the heading * Paul ', but no assumption is thus made as to the authorship and integrity of all those Epistles. And on pp. 191 f. a distinctive mark has been placed against words found only in the Pastoral Epistles. 6. An inconsistent way of using the names of the Evangelists (or the abbreviations Mt, Mk, Lk) has been found unavoid- able : sometimes the Gospel itself as it stands, sometimes xvi Preliminary Notices and Explanations the author or compiler of it, is thus denoted. But I hope that the context will always show at a glance which is meant. 7. The figures in thick type after the name of a book or writer (e. g. Matthew 6, Paul 12, Rev 3) mean that a word or phrase is used so many times in that book or by that writer. (In such cases ' Luke ' includes only the third Gospel, the occurrences in Acts being enumerated separately; and, as has been already said, 'John' includes only the fourth Gospel.) Similarly LXX 4, LXX 22, &c., denote that the word or phrase is used so many times in the Septuagint. HORAE SYNOPTICAE PART I WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF EACH OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS THAT two at least of the Synoptic Gospels are compila- tions is evident upon the face of them, because of the different ways in which the same materials are used. And there are other less obvious phenomena which support this conclusion. But before attempting to discover the number and the nature of the sources used by the compilers, and so to enter upon the most obscure part of the Synoptic Problem, the ground should be cleared as far as possible by a careful endeavour to discover how much in the Gospels is owing to those who used the sources. In trying thus to mark and to estimate the additions made independently by each of the authors or compilers, it is the most obvious and most usual course to lay stress on the words peculiar to each Gospel, and from them to judge of the style of the several writers. But though these are not to be overlooked (and lists of them, drawn up for another purpose, can be referred to on pages 1 99 ff. of this book), their importance for our present purpose may easily be over-estimated. For by far the larger number of them viz. five-sevenths of those in Matthew and six-sevenths of those in Mark and Luke are used only once ; and in all three Gospels a smaller proportion than ten per cent. is used more than twice (viz. in Matthew 10 words out of 112, in Mark 4 out of 71, and in Luke 10 out of 261). : 2/ . Words ,a,nd Phrases characteristic Pt. i Now words that are not used more than once or twice cannot have very much weight as proofs of the habitual style of any writer. It is, therefore, much more important to examine words which are used more frequently, though it may not be exclusively, and to see which of them are used so predominantly in each Gospel as to be apparently characteristic of each compiler, and therefore presumably due to him. To bring together such 'characteristic words and phrases ' is the object of the first and most elaborate series of tables in this book. It will be seen that the number of them in Luke (151) exceeds by more than one-third the number in the slightly shorter Gospel of Matthew (95), which is more than twice as large as the number in the very much shorter 1 Gospel of Mark (41). In the case of each Gospel a few words are placed in brackets ( ) as being less important than the rest, because they are mainly or entirely accounted for by the subject- matter, and therefore give little or no indication of the author's style, although their insertion in the lists was required by the rules here adopted. 2 And there are some other entries marked f, on which, for various reasons, but little stress can be laid. On the other hand an asterisk * is prefixed to the most distinctive and important instances. In the columns headed ' Peculiar ' and ' Common ' it is shown how often each word or phrase occurs respectively in those portions of each Gospel which have not, and in 1 Nestle gives, on the authority of ' American scholars ', the number of words in the Greek N. T. as being in Luke 19,209, in Matthew 18,222, in Mark 11,158. Textual Criticism of N. T., p. 48. 3 No such rules can be quite satisfactory means of excluding all non- characteristic, and including all characteristic words. But of course it was necessary to adopt rules of some kind (and I think those here employed are as fair tests of what is 'characteristic' as can be devised), in order that the lists may be unaffected by one's own views or opinions or ' personal equation'. I see that very similar rules were adopted in Carpenter and Harford-Battersby's Hexateuch (1900) for the purpose of distinguishing words and phrases characteristic of the various documentary sources (i. 183 f.). of each of the Synoptic Gospels 3 those portions which have, parallels in one or both of the other Synoptic Gospels : and in the cases of Matthew and Luke, chapters i and ii have been kept separate from the other ' peculiar ' portions, and placed in a column of their own. For some of the results which are thus brought out, see pages 9, 14, 24, 26. SECTION I WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL I propose to take as ' characteristic ', words or phrases which occur at least fair times in this Gospel, and which either (a) are not found at all in Mark or Luke, or which (b) are found in Matthew at least twice as often as in Mark and Luke together. 95 such words and phrases are here collected and tabu- lated. On the grounds explained on page 2, 15 of them are bracketed, 9 are marked with f, and 14 with *. Chapters i and ii, containing 48 verses, have a column to themselves. The other passages regarded as * peculiar ' to Matthew, because without parallels in Mark or Luke, contain about 290 verses, viz. iii. 14, 15; iv. 13^-16; v. 7-10 ; 14 ; 16, 17 ; 19-24 ; 27, 28 ; 31 ; 33-38 ; 41 ; 43 ; vi. 1-8 ; 16-18 ; 34 ; vii. 6 ; 12 b ; 15 ; viii. 17 ; ix. 13 a ; 27-33 ; x - 5,6; 8 ; i6; 23 ; 36 ; 41 ; xi. 28-30 ; xii.5-7; 17-21; 36, 37; 40; xiii. 14 a- 24-30; 35; 3 6 ~53 5 xiv - 28-31 ; xv. 12, 13 ; xvi. 17-19 ; xvii. 24-27 ; xviii. 10 ; 14 ; 16-20; 23-35; xix. 10-12; xx. 1-16; xxi. 4, 5; 10, n ; 14-16; 28-32; 43; xxii. 1-14 (P) 1 ; 40; xxiii. 1-3; 5; 7-10; 15-22; 24; 30; 32, 33; xxiv. u, 12; 2o; 300; xxv. 1-12; 14-30 (?); 31-46; xxvi. 15 ; 25; 50; 52-54; xxvii. 3-10 ; 19 ; 24, 25 ; 36 ; 43 ; 51 -53 ; 62-66 ; xxviii. 2-4; 9-20. 1 The doubt only extends to verses i-io. E 2 I .0 NHOf sxoy uoiuiuoQ X % U.CT 3 C C M *C S '7 - 1 N " ^2 M c< M \o co*** M i>- M * TJ- ' ON ty H 'i -sdB43 10 5 ^- VO ** 10 VO 1 rf .*) Hh *>>o uT rt 'Z OPJ > WrH | g M u * ^ v 2 ^ s *i *" *> .SJ? vo a | r ^ m ?- _ e G "O V S hp) * U-o- < & 0*0 M 00 N CO CO M . . M M hH fO N ON t* ^ ^ -noaj aaq 1O CO t> W N CO M ^f ^J" -t CO : ,^^ : 10 ^ : eo ^ V s 5 S rt fHii?;iiU1 I- w b ^ ^5 ^rn vw ij ^ 5, g cj js s 5. V 2 3^,^ ^ a.- 5.O 5 i. 5. 3.0-tO "O "O H co .5 .- <* > s 5o J2 u < *J 10 S *S 2 5 "" n T 1 i ^ *** 2" 6 5 g .6 .S 1 H w 0>WI< S a o a ; ; ; 1-1 IO CO 00 VO O i~- . . io co w M . . . * . H . . . . . . . . ^ M ' M ^ ' ' ' TJ- . " H M o ' ; 11 00 : : N j^MO^TflMM ::*>::" M M M M M 1C N CO ; M ; M M IO M 2 *--* 2 o ro M co'x-^ M ^ t^ a\ cooo -<* CO""t->-iCOCO^MwVO s ^ M M O M ? 1^ N H to^ xo tO"^--^-r^iOTj-^"u rf ' o ih M M co co CO CO CO CO -I" <3 o ' (* a c '_2 S -..- -a S * * S &4 I 9 C S Cl^etmii c-'-Q. (^ o b b Qb 5? N , ^1 vw b b +- to 1 t: o oo 8 Words and Phrases characteristic continued) ^ 1 ^ ...O T5 Sfr M Tf X - M CO ^ CO-IO NHOf 10 00 M 10 : - S3 sxoy M N CO SJJ-BJ JBIJ -noaj aaq^o Hi MVO CO VOVOVO 2,^0 r? t^ 2? 10 t^ 10 vo Wi "* CO o H i 8 I f 0> 73 SJ I 1O 00 10 ON i. Mt of each of the Synoptic Gospels 9 Other words and phrases, which do not fall under the above rules, but nevertheless are to be noted as more or less characteristic of St. Matthew's Gospel, are 8ta TOUTO, fOvLKos, eratpoj, Kara = * against ', Ko'oyzo?, fjLa6rjTVO), ftaXaxta, OVK or ovbeiroT* aveyvtoTt ; 0^X01, irovr]p6s (besides the cases with the article noticed above), aetco, ^^L And see addi- tional note on the fewness of imperfect tenses (p. 51). Some Remarks on the above Matthaean Words and Phrases. Out of the 95 different words and phrases, 25 are found once or more in chapters i, ii ; 42 of them in Mark and 56 in Luke ; 46 of them in Acts, and 1 1 in the ' We '-Sections of that book (see pp. 176, 184). Chapters i, ii contain 48 of the 1,068 1 verses of this Gospel, i. e. only about one twenty-second part of the whole. But they contain considerably more than one- ninth of the occurrences of the c characteristic ' words and phrases, viz. 107 out of 904. This is partly accounted for by the use of yezwaco 40 times in the genealogy ; but even if those 40 items are deducted from both numbers, chapters i, ii are found to contain upwards of one-thirteenth of such occurrences, viz. 67 out of 864. It appears, then, that these ' characteristic ' words and phrases are used considerably more freely in these two chapters than in the rest of the book. 1 According to the ordinary numbering 1,071 ; but the best texts and R. V. omit xvii. 21 ; xviii. n; xxiii. 13 or 14, thus reducing the number to i ,068. io Word and Phrases characteristic Pt. i C Taking the whole of the ' peculiar ' or unparalleled matter in this Gospel, including chapters i, ii, 1 it fills about 338 out of the i ,068 verses, i. e. less than one-third, which would be 356 verses. It thus appears that the occurrences of * characteristic ' words and phrases are very much more abundant in the ' peculiar ' than in the ' common ' portions of the Gospel ; for there are 482 of them in the ' peculiar ' division and only 422 of them in the ' common ' division, while the latter is more than twice as large as the former. It should be observed, however, that several of the words which do most in producing this predominance (e. g. aTrodi- 8ft)^t, ya/xo?, yeiwaa), &&VLOV, o/xwa>, raXavrov) are words which are required by the subject-matter, and which therefore are not important as evidences of style. SECTION II WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF ST. MARK'S GOSPEL As this Gospel is shorter than either of the other two by more than one- third, the standard for determining what words and phrases are ' characteristic * of it should be different from that which is applied to Matthew and Luke. I will therefore take as such the words and phrases which occur at least three times in Mark, and which either (a) are not found at all in Matthew or Luke> or (b) occur in Mark more often than in Matthew and Luke together. Of these, 41 2 are here collected and tabulated : 2 of them 1 For the differences both in form and substance between the two genealogies are so great that they cannot be regarded as dependent on a common source, though they contain many of the same names. 3 This number would be reduced from 41 to 31 if we took (as in Matthew and Luke) only those occurring 4 times and upwards. ii. Mk of each of the Synoptic Gospels n are bracketed, 5 are marked f, and 7 are marked * (see on these marks p. 2, above). The parts of the Gospel here regarded as ' peculiar ', because without parallels in Matthew or Luke, amount to about 50 verses, viz. i. i ; 33 ; ii. 27 ; iii. 9 ; 17 b ; 20, 21 ; iv. 26-29; 36 #; vi. 20 #; 31; 37 #; 52; vii. 2-4; 24 #; 32-37 ; viii. 14 b ; 22-26 ; ix. 15 ; 21 ; 23, 24 ; 30 ; 48, 49 ; 50 b ; x. 10 ; 32 b (not c) ; xi. 16 ; xii. 32, 33 ; xiii. 34 b ; xiv. 51, 52 ; 56 /^ ; 59 ; xv. 8 ; 21 b ; 25 ; 44, 45 ; xvi. 8 b. 12 i *> CO ^ .co $ !rl3 " |.9o ic B \L 'N NHOf invj sxoy P UOUIUJ03 SJJBJ CJ 10 CO tCOO CO ^ ^ CO 10 10 XOOO "* ^ ^ VO ^5 W Tj- M rt-xs N M CO M j N ! V> 2*7- 5- o Tt- co ** AV3HXXVj/\[ PH g*G *o o ^ >-* , " ^.r s * -a co co S * -5 5 w * w * ^> -i- S -*- 10 o to 1 E-3 J CD hb -S 2 * i ^ ^ o o a o- * Used theologically 8 Also in the doubtfu * Also in Appendix, a Both in iv. 28. O T" ' to g 2 < ^M : : a M : : : : co^. : N . hi N : : N o\ M . 01 . . N M . M : i : co N M SN ^. : M M : : : : : : ^ : : : : MM : e, *g 00 %>|C t n f- j -i va ItljF 1^?" 14 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i There are some other words, &c., which do not quite fall under the above rules, yet which deserve consideration as being characteristic of Mark, viz. d\Aa, CK (compared with ewro), eTTfpcorda), foa, 1 KCU where Matthew and Luke have 8^, the historic present in other words besides cpyopai (e.g. Ae'yco, pow, and Trwpoxrtj. The omission of Tropevo/xcu, 2 except in ix. 30 WH (not Tisch or R) is remarkable, since it occurs in Matthew 28, Luke 50, Acts 37, John 13 ; also in Appendix to Mark 3, and in Pericope de Adultera 3. Observe also the entire omission of Kat Ibov, and, in narrative, of Ibov 3 ; and the absence of the form eoro)? and of the word vopos ; also the rarity of KaXclv (Matthew 26, Mark 4, Luke 43, but cf. also John 2), and of ovv (Matthew 56, Mark 4 ; Luke 31, John 194). 4 Some Remarks on the above Marcan Words and Phrases. A Out of the 41 different words and phrases, 16 are found in the 50 ' peculiar ' verses, while 25 of them are found in Matthew, 2 2, in Luke, 22 in Acts, and 7 in the 'We'- Sections of that book (see pp. 176, 184). B The 50 verses which have been regarded as ' peculiar ' to this Gospel constitute nearly one- thirteenth of the 66 1 5 verses contained in the whole Gospel (excluding the Appendix, xvi. 9-20). But they contain nearly one-tenth 1 The numbers in the historical books are Mt 41, Mk 65, Lk 45, Acts 15, John 145. It must be remembered always, in estimating the significance of such numbers, that Mk is less than two-thirds of the length of Mt or Lk. Bearing this in mind, we may notice that tfpa.To, fipavro are found in Mt 9 times, Mk 25, Lk 19, Acts 5, Jn 1. a The simple verb is not used ; but on the other hand we have seen above that tla-rroptvoiMi and (Kiropevopai are more or less characteristic of Mark, and he uses also irapa-, irpoff-, cruv-, and probably Sianoptvoftai. 3 On ISov see J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T. Greek, i. u. 4 See Abbott, Joh. Gram., 2191, and Joh. Foe., 1885 d. 5 According to the usual numbering 666 ; but the best texts and R. V. omit vii. 16; ix. 44, 46 ; xi. 26 ; xv. 28, thus reducing the number to 661. ii. Mk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 15 of the occurrences of the characteristic words and phrases, viz. 37 out of 357. So those words and phrases are rather more frequent in the ' peculiar ' than in the * common ' parts of the Gospel. For further discussion of the language of this Gospel, see below, Part III, especially pp. 143 ff. on the uses of the historic present and KOI. SECTION III WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL Here, as in the case of Matthew, I take as ' characteristic ' the words and phrases which occur at least four times in this Gospel, and which either (a) are not found at all in Matthew or Mark> or (b) are found in Luke at least tivice as often as in Matthew and Mark together. Of these 151 will be found here : 8 of them are bracketed, ii are marked f, and 21 are marked *, for the reasons given on p. 2. Chapters i and ii, containing 132 verses, are placed in a column by themselves. The other portions of the Gospel which are here regarded as ' peculiar ', because without parallels in Matthew or Mark, amount to about 367 verses, viz. iii. 10-14; 23-38 > iv. 16-30 (?); v. i-n(?); vi. 24-26; vii. 11-17 ; 3 6 -5 (?) J viii. 1-3 ; ix. 31 ; 51-56 ; 61, 62 ; x. i ; 17-20; 28-42^x1.5-8; 12; 27,28; 37,38; xii. 13-21; 47-5; 57; xiii. 1-17; 31-33 ;xiv. 1-14; 15-24 (?) ; 28-33; xv. 6-32 ; xvi. 1-12 ; 14, 15 ; 19-31 ; xvii. 7-19 ; 28, 29 ; 32; xviii. 1-14; xix. i-io ; n-27(?); 39~44 \ xxi. 23 #, 24; 28; xxii. 15; 27-32; 35~3 8 ; 5i; 53 ^; xxiii. 7-**; 27-3 1 ; 39-43 5 46 ; *xiv. T3-53- 1 (See also pp. 194 ff. on some smaller Lucan additions not included here.) 1 xii. 54, 55 and xx. 18 have to be added (bringing up the number of verses to 370), if the parallels to them in Mt xvi. 2, 3 and xxi. 44 are rejected from the text. Perhaps, indeed, the former passage should be added in any case. i6 i I X - NHOf IIIAXX-IUX : oo M M | cog I i 8! l uoui 11103 -noaj JaqiQ u 'i -s M M m . M *** to *< *>*<> <* ^- ^ rt- ^ XHVJ.\[ fei *l |s 3 M " r " 1 "~ S .* 'E ji M . K s X S i .1 a . . . . . g : t t i : * i ; t ** . . ON vo M . . M co ~ : : : : : ^ ' : : M ^ N M ? : jvovo : vo :vo loS-vc > ; M co o\ ^4- : : : : M : M M ' : : : vo : : M M : : : M *$ CO VO i>- -< t-^ CO VO : N ^.^N^ ' JO | N 1O CO'LOCO ^"""""^ . * O o , ~,^ :^> : -. o M : vo . ^M M COCOCOCOr^ i^" 1 ^ ' M <* N Tj-^-OA^fOVOOO COM-^J>- ^ "N IO M MOONMCOCOTfCOCOl'-VOMWM'^- M CO ^ CO ^j ^'wMCOl I M M -* -M IM -00 'MCO M -COfO v> ^ IOOO -^VOVOOO O M ^^ M N "^ I I^lMMMCOfOM -MMNNMIO-N -CO * ' C0^2 ^ ^ V d - J * v - B q ' * 'ON o a "t^ 5^ 'S q ocT o O\ fO CO . ^^ ^h^~~* co *p! . . A . p,*Q ^d,^ 01 h ' p, 5. , - '3 ^ -B S * ^ ' ' *.r^ ' ' *^^b3b3 * h o vg: rt -5 0> 3"3S ' I i ,<; ST 1 1*4 |4A s * s ^l-'S 2 ^ r if, v- S ~ l \Z * 9. * 9 ? ?< -3 ** ^S x\u w . * CU R 1 >e fe.2 S o HAWKINS ^ A o V u3 xvw K S H vrr- C ">J> < x '^ ^C o ^w co ^ 2 2 S -!5 * o "w w ?* ?^eo v_^* cocococococo* * * M vo O vo N CO CO c 18 ^> uiT i, . ^ o g Si CO - *?^ ^* I S| ? $ Z > v 1 5 aS. s .5 OT 1 \ \\l ^ s * ^ 5'" ^ *3 J ; o ^ J := vo ? > co ^ U : M : : Tt- co ^ s J*^H ^ NHOf ; ; - ; ; - ... <* s> invj M i-c : o ^ t- M N CO O N 1 ^-' s * *> SUOI1D3S : . : : : : : : : -^ s nuxx-inx 2 ' 'sdeqf)' M ; ; M f<+ % <^ nx-i "sdnqQ : : : ro^ o ^COU, N M^ ^^ ,s c SJJBJ JBIJ C> 10 M M M M fr- M roiococoM N t^^. * g no 3d aaqiQ co M r* t_3 n '; -sdBq3 : : to M 10 10 s "1 Wl * ^o,^.o^S ^ ^vo 10 -4- 10 t^ ^ v, 85 XXVJ\[ g M3HX1VJ\[ M M CO CO : XOM M N M : ^ ! ^ ^ .... s-~~ o o\ ^* o ^S rC CO . ** ri ** *^^s C/* ^'^^ ^ -* S S roj^ 1 gl aT . I- $ * |^ "rf^ , $1- 3,4 1 f|l}if!f| IlMflJi lO O s .: I > > * a . s f & * - 8 85" co S lif'al " 2 &- If 3 N W g - . o 8 3 .S T3 ill COOO M 1O M g M co : : M -CO M hH "*> 2O J^ CO CO M d M i~- M M N N -Ml/ 5 CO *i CO \ M | M I ' ON iO t~ 'O to NN M-^It^M vo;M N M CO N W Tf N tf) . . ; co ' . . * 00 M M ' I M ! I M ^ : S M I "^- I M CO N M M CO M * * " c S " ' .> Tf . . ex _^_^ ^ 5^ ~ n ^ w* M ^ .22 , n fe 01 a H H *"*"'*'' V O ^" i. -s. } o cJ c3 g I' c .i ^ ^ o 1 * _ .^J ^1 s r-| h > ? ^ u> W U/ S.-S h"^ 1,1 4>^i . V =L IT 8*1 =Lp 2- v O O H i 1 ^ s ^ (~) . (/ J/T * V g .S " fr v l '1 'I it i fOZO/UDJLTDX O/nvyD-MJJf o s * & 5.^1 3 *S 5 ^ -5-5 H !! o 1C 10 o vo 00 C 2 20 i % 8 -s 1 NHOf suoipas I1IAXX-1HX ii 1>- ^ .TT ^ . ft ' *7o **M- *2 " ~~> ^ "M i*_ ^^ CX O g '-' '^''fo -b * 'S Hs- (? - [g 3 ^2 e( 2 &i S ^ M . -2 ' ^ > ^' C5 . . . c o < >Q. i. .^^ p *T"t Q.. ^^ s? itf O r^ *. ?2 . g P. 2 B 1 -4 .3 .vg-, ? I * 1 l^illil - 1? ^ ^ 5 A r ,r;^d^ iS^Ss*!^ TO O IO 00 O\ ON 21 8s- 'E o^ f~{ j^ pH SB c o CtJ S 00 ro M o\ ro ro M -oo g ro ro oo M > ^ : ^ ^ M N ro ; M -ON M M roroio>-< H t--ro;; ^- j>. ro to ""t* vo vo O^H VO "" N ^ tO^O M M ON ^r : M S 5 ^ : N 10 ^ ro M M IO s^ro MC^IOM NIO %>oo Mri-Tfro^'Mro "^ ' 10 1-1 N M * ' oo 100 ro ^i- ON ro M M ^** N M VO OO M : : oo N : ' o ^. o vo o ro ON MMM ! '. : M !t-i : M M : < fa " b bCrf b b v * -f- t= Hr- -i- V j 10 o 2 .3 N N * IO . CO a, b *3 3 1 22 NHof invj suoirpas IllAXX-lllX '"-s.dBq'5 UOUIUJO3 SMBJ JBH 0*(0 M MMCO tj OO " 00 CO OO O MM ro Ma M 1000 M : M M o M .' ; c> IN! N ' ^ AV3HiXVJ\[ <^ :MM-M::CO:NM: MVOM 1 . Tf* o^.o - 00 S | J | *i 5 s 2 a f? 4j nn M 'O . s ij '55-3 a S:g ~ !!, *H ^ 8 * o PL, H -5 S *"* C J2 ^ J2 'S "c O'TJ .5 B "* rt '^ 3! ?. ^ | SVOMMN JTf NTf-^ IO^"M | W ON CO vo VO VO -COM 00^;^; M CO "- M w : M : : H oo ^ SS M M vo ON *SJ2"^" MN " M COMCO COVO COOO ^*" co^M^ 00 :^ vooo^ ^^^"co^vo M VO ON VO O M s^oo M^ii^ NCOCO >* co covo vo ^^"^ :7o M M ^^ i vONVOOO'To bo vo 0_ vo } ^ w !* * E? N ^^ ^"1 VOVOTJ- ^ .00 ON 2 s "ON co 00 x x vo ~ ^COli-iCOlM MM! CO^'.'CO vo 'o ^ ?! b Q. -^ ^ .S ^ ON . . * S G ex. 5 . 3 . . , ^*S*"6fl . 1 -^ 3 -S ^ -S f 3^0.^ ^. 1. 5 | "g ^5 g ^ ^ ^"f CH> 4- 4--G- >< *^><* 3 3 O vo O ^- TJ- xo 24 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i And, besides the instances which will be found entered in two subsidiary lists in an Appendix (pp. 27, 28), there are some other words and phrases which, though not quite falling under the above rules, are to be observed as more or less characteristic of Luke, viz. CLKOVU with TOV \6yov, a\r)6&$ with Aeyw vfuv, ajuaprcoAo's, avO' <5z>, aTra? (but the readings are often uncertain), Set, 8ta rd with infinitive, eyyi'fw (especially in narrative), efrjy, at e/)?j/Aoi, evXoye'co, YJV and i]y, KCU ya/>, Kare'xco, ^rdvoia, juoroyezn/s (always with datives), o8wdo/icu, OIKOS (as against ot/cta), Trpoo-e'xcre eauroty, (TTrcvSco, avv\aipa), vyiaiva, o'/3os. Observe also the extreme rarity of the historic present in the narrative (only in vii. 40 ; viii. 49 ; xi. 37, 45 ; xxiv. i 2 (?), 36 (?), in contrast with Matthew 78, Mark 151) 2 ; the rarity of Q.\M\V (Matthew 31, Mark 13, Luke 6), and of -na\iv (Matthew 17, Mark 28, Luke 3), and of vTrayw (Matthew 19, Mark 16, Luke 5 ; see Abbott, Joh. Voc.> 1653 f.); the absence of pafSpti (Matthew 4, Mark 3, John 8 only). Some Remarks on the above Lucan Words and Phrases. A Of the 151 different words and phrases, no less than 77, being more than half of them, occur once or more in chapters i, ii ; 91 of them are found in Matthew and 69 of them in Mark; and there are no less than 115 of them in Acts, and 45 in the brief * We '-Sections of that book (see pp. 176, 184). B 74 of them are absent from chapters i, ii ; only 15 of them are absent from the ' other peculiar ' portions (see below), and only 6 of them from the whole of the ' peculiar ' 1 There are some uncertainties as to readings, but the numbers in the historical books are approximately Matthew 52, Mark 47, Luke 122, Acts 162. John 77. (Only the references to the One God are included.) 2 See more on this below, pp. 149 flf. in. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 25 portions including chapters i, ii ; and only 12 of them from the ' common ' portions. C The number of verses in Luke i, ii is 132, being rather more than one-ninth of the M49 1 verses into which the Gospel is divided. But they contain 212, i. e. almost exactly one-seventh, of the occurrences of the ' characteristic ' words and phrases. So we find here (as in the case of Matthew, but not to so large an extent) that such ex- pressions are used more abundantly in the first two chapters than in the rest of the Gospel. D In the other 22 chapters there are 367 verses which have here been classed as ' peculiar ' to Luke, as being apparently drawn from sources not used by Matthew or Mark. When the 132 verses of chapters i, ii are added to these, we have altogether 499 ' peculiar ' verses against 650 ' common ' verses in this Gospel. That is to say, the peculiar portions constitute very little more than three-sevenths of the whole 1,149 verses. But they are found to contain 777, or more than half of the 1,483 occurrences of the 140 ' characteristic ' words and phrases, which are thus seen to be scattered considerably more thickly over the ' peculiar ' than the ' common ' portions. And here we find, to a much larger extent than we found in the case of Matthew, that the ' characteristic ' expressions which thus predominate are on the whole 2 such as are indications of the author's style, not being merely words required or suggested by the subject-matter : see e. g. eyeWro KCH ; KO! CLVTOS ; Kvptos ; OJUOI'ODJ ; ris with nouns ; rov before infinitives ; w? = when. 3 1 According to the ordinary numbering 1,151; but the best texts and R. V. omit xvii. 36 and xxiii. 17, bringing down the number to 1,149. 2 Not exclusively, for Sftca and yum are exceptions. 3 See also eros, (ixppaivaj, KoiXia, m/XTrX^yuf, ir\ovaios, (f>i\os. 26 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i SECTION IV GENERAL REMARKS ON THE WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF THE THREE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS A The chief result of an examination of the above lists is a very strong impression that the compilers (or at any rate Matthew and Luke, for probably Mark is mainly a source) dealt very freely with the sources which they used. To a large extent they clothed the narratives, and to some extent they clothed the sayings, 1 which they derived from those sources, in their own favourite language. Therefore it is less surprising to me than it would other- wise be to fail, as after a careful search I have failed, to find any expressions which can be certainly set down as charac- teristic of any source (whether Logian, Marcan, or specially Lucan). See also p. 113 below. B The following is a comparative summary of results as to the distribution of the characteristic words and phrases : 1. In Matthew, they are scattered more than twice as thickly over the peculiar portions (including chapters i-ii) as they are over the common portions. 2 2. In Mark, they are rather more thickly scattered over the small peculiar portions than they are over the large common portions. 3. In Luke, they are scattered slightly more than half as thickly again (but very much less than twice as thickly) over the peculiar portions as they are over the common portions. 1 On the far greater frequency of verbal coincidences in the recitative than in the narrative portions of the Gospels, see Westcott, Introduction to Study of Gospels, pp. 198-200 (8th ed. 1895). 2 But this is largely caused by the special subject-matter of some of the parables, and by yevvata : therefore 15 of the Matthaean words are bracketed, as comparatively unimportant, against 2 of the Marcan and 8 of the Lucan ones. A P px.i.Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 27 PH O H I I r . O X Ht Q W PH co cj H co i i P4 W H CJ < P4 < K cj < CJ D hJ CO H CO CO o equirements characteristic ^ v > _9 s'sS ^ ^ .|3 rt O 43 gD^H "" 2 43 I S-4 > M I cj O *j ^ CO O aT * c 13 a (-1 git .Ti 00^ ^ s a s -2 H E * C/3 tl 3 I! ^ 5^ 43 O g ^ s 5 .1 CO I Cu s b 11 " NHOf ,0 M 00 Os IJIAXX-IUX H x -! uouj 11103 CO O COVO GO IO N M 1C CO J>- CO CO CO 10 'E "^ O S3 O O en 51 >V T QH c3 ^ J^ G / oJ S 3 -a !* 3- ^ i >s ^Q ^ o ^ G G o I .0 J CO G O co c o CO *t3 - fl cu o5 .9 II ^ cn l-ScS o s ^ o g ^ .| 2 ^ c/3 H n l 1 11 X -j^ jo xsa- M HH M : : : M : so NHOf SUOUD3S -^M.^MX UlAXX-IllX jix-i SJ4BJ UOUIIUO3 ro ro M N "^J i. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 29 c > m N -C '> g 10 30 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. APPENDIX II TO PART I I HERE give the references to the occurrences of those of the 'characteristic words and phrases' on pp. 4-21, which do not stand consecutively in a Concordance, and which therefore cannot be quite easily traced there. I. WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL uk oupacui'. Mt iii. 2 ; iv. 17 ; v. 3, 10, 19 bis, 20 ; vii. 21 ; viii. n ; x. 7 ; xi. n, 12; xiii. n, 24, 31, 33, 44, 45, 47, 52; xvi. 19; xviii. i, 3, 4, 23 ; xix. 12, 14, 23 ; xx. i ; xxii. 2 ; xxiii. 14; xxv. i. Compare /3ao-iA'a ro\> Geoi), or eeoi), Mt 4, Mk 14, Lk 32, Acts 6, Paul 8, Jn 2, Rev 1. See Allen, Intr. to Matt., Ivi and Ixxi. See additional note, p. 52, on the use of ovpavos and ovpavoi. Mt vi. 10 ; viii. 13*; ix. 29*; xv. 28*; xxvi. 42. Acts i, 20 (LXX). Rom xi. 9 (LXX). * These three times with reference to miracles of healing. Mt i. 24; ii. 13, 14, 20, 21 ; viii. 26 ; ix. 7, 19 (also 6 in TRWH mg). Lk xi. 8. Jn xxi. 8 of the risen Christ. Rom vi. 9; vii. 4 (-m); viii. 34; 2 Cor v. 15 (-J/TI) : all of the risen Christ. Compare the Lucan awards. eis = TIS (or our indefinite article). Mt viii. 19; xviii. 24 (?) ; xxi. 19; xxvi. 69. (Perhaps also ix. 18, which, if els is the right reading, would correspond to els rS>v in Mk v. 22 as xxvi. 69 does to /xia rS>v in Mk xiv. 66.) . ii. Mt of each of the Synoptic Gospels 31 Rev viii. 13; ix. 13; xviii. 21 ; xix. 17. See "IHK (under headings 3 and 4) in BDB Heb. Lex. ; also Blass, Gram., p. 144; J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 96 f. Compare the use of ets- n? in Mk xiv. 47 (?), Lk xxii. 50, Jn xi. 47, and dvo nvds in Lk vii. 18. Mt v. 21, 27, 31, 33, 38, 43. Rom ix. 12, 26 (LXX). (Also fppedrjffav in Gal iii. 16.) Rev vi. 1 1 ; ix. 4. Mt x. 15 ; xi. 22, 24 ; xii. 36. 2 Pet ii. 9 ; iii. 7 ; i Jn iv. 17. See also Kiais. I8ou after genitive absolute. Mt i. 20; ii. i, 13, 19 ; ix. 10 [WH KO.\ I8ov, Tisch with ND latt &c. idou] 18, 32; xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47; xxviii. n. Lk xxii. 47. Xy6fXi/os, used with names. Mt i. 16; ii. 23; iv. 18; ix. 9; x. 2; xxvi. 3, 14, 36; xxvii. 16, 17, 22, 33&>. Mk xv. 7. Lk xxii. i, 47. Acts iii. 2 ; vi. 9. Jn iv. 5, 25 ; ix. n ; xi. 16, 54 ; xix. 13, 17 ; xxi. 2. Or ear. Mt vii. 12 ; xviii. 18 ^w ; xxi. 22 ; xxii. 9 ; xxiii. 3. Mk iii. 28 ; vi. 56. Lk ix. 5. Acts ii. 39; iii. 22. Jn xi. 22. Rev- iii. 19; xiii. 15. rjpuy, ujuiwi/, aou, Mtv. 16, 45, 48; vi. i, 4, 6 &j, 8, 9 (jj/zSi/ here only), 14, 15, 18 bis, 26, 32 ; vii. n ; x. 20, 29 ; xiii. 43 ; xxiii. 9. Mk xi. 25 (on this case as unique in Mk, see Abbott, Joh. Vocab., 1697, 17110). 32 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt.i Lk vi. 36; xii. 30, 32. Rom i. 7 ; i Cor i. 3 ; 2 Cor i. 2 ; Gal i. 4 ; Eph i. 2 ; Phil i. 2 ; iv. 20; Col i. 2 ; i Thes i. 3 ; iii. u, 13 ; 2 Thes i. 2 ; ii. 16; Philem 3. (Always fi^5>v in Paul.) Jn xx. 17. riaTTjp 6 eK (rots) oupayois. Mt v. 16, 45; vi. i, 9; vii. u, 21; x. 32, 33; xii. 50; xvi. 17; xviii. 10, 14, 19. Mk xi. 25. n\6s used metaphorically. Mt xv. 14 a [in Tisch and WH mg bis\ ; xviii. 16, 17, 19, 24, 26. Rom ii. 19. Jn ix. 39, 40, 41. 2 Pet i. 9 ; Rev iii. 17. Mt xv. 1 4 b (bis) and Lk vi. 39 bis are not included, because they form part of the material of a ' parable ', and thus are used in the literal sense. HAWKINS D 34 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i Mt i. 20; ii. 7, 13, 19 ; vi. 5, 16, 18; ix. 33; xiii. 26; xxiii. 27, 28 ; xxiv. 27, 30. Mk xiv. 64. (Also in Appendix, xvi. 9.) Lk ix. 8 ; xxiv. n. Rom vii. 13 ; 2 Cor xiii. 7 ; Phil ii. 15. Heb xi. 3 ; Jam iv. 14; i Pet iv. 18. The active . Also in the addition to Lk vi. 5 in Codex D. \ diro TOU vuv. Lk i. 48; v. 10; xii. 52; xxii. 18, 69. Acts xviii. 6. 2 Cor v. 1 6. (Also in Pericope de Adultera, Jn viii. ii.) apxoyres, of the Jews. Lk xiv. i ; xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20. Acts iii. 17 ; iv. 5, 8, 26; xiii. 27. Jn vii. 26, 48 ; xii. 42. (Cf. also iii. i.) And it is Lk only (xviii. 1 8) who speaks of the rich (in Mt young) man as apxa>v. ycyokos, TO. Mk v. 14 (= Lk viii. 34). Lk ii. 15 (with prjp.fi); viii. 34, 35, 36. (xxiv. 12 is not reckoned.) Acts iv. 21 ; v. 7 ; xiii. 12. yfropai with eirt and accusative. Mt xxvii. 45. Mk xiv. 33. Lk i. 65* ; iii. 2 ; iv. 25, 36f ; xxiii. 44 (the parallel to Mt and Mk) ; xxiv. 22. Acts iv. 2 2 ; v. 5*, 1 1 * ; x. 10 ; xxi. 35. * (frofios eyevfTo (cf. also Acts ii. 43). t Qapftos fyevcro. Acts iv. 5 and xix. 10, referring to time, are not included here ; see p. 187. eW is followed by a genitive in Lk xxii. 40; Jn vi. 21 ; Rev xvi. 1 8 (Acts xi. 28 is not in point). ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 37 C v ' Oe K(Xl. Mt x. 30 ; xviii. 17 ; xxv. 24. (xxiv. 49 is not reckoned.) Mk xiv. 3 1 (?) ; xv. 40. Lk ii. 4; iii. 9, 12; iv. 41 ; v. 10, 36 ; vi. 39 ; ix. 61 ; x. 32 ; xi. 1 8 ; xii. 54, 57 ; xiv. 12 ; xvi. i, 22 ; xviii. 9 ; xix. 19 ; xx. ii, 12, 31 ; xxi. 16; xxii. 24; xxiii. 32, 35, 38. Acts ii. 26; v. 16 ; xiii. 5 ; xix. 31 ; xxi. 16 ; xxii. 28 ; xxiv. 9. Rom viii. 26 ; i Cor i. 16 ; iv. 7 ; vii. 3, 4, 28 ; xiv. 15 ; xv. 15 (?); 2 Cor iv. 3 ; v. n ; vi. i ; viii. n ; xi. 6 ; Eph v. n ; Phil iii. 18; iv. 15; i Tim v. 13, 24; 2 Tim ii. 5; Tit iii. 14; Philem 9, 22. Jn ii. 2 ; iii. 23 ; xv. 24 ; xviii. 2, 5 ; xix. 19, 39 ; xxi. 25. Jam ii. 2, 25; 2 Pet i. 15 ; ii. i ; Jude 14. These references can only be verified in Bruder, for Moulton and Geden's Concordance omits both &f and KM. TOI> 0Ol>. Mt ix. 8; xv. 31 adding 'loymqA. (Cf. also v. 16.) Mk ii. 12. Lk ii. 20; v. 25, 26 (the parallel to Mt and Mk) ; vii. 16; xiii. 13; xvii. 15; xviii. 43; xxiii. 47. Acts iv. 21 ; xi. 18 ; xxi. 20. (Cf. also xiii. 48.) Rom i. 21 ; xv. 6, 9 ; i Cor vi. 20 ; 2 Cor ix 13 ; Gal. i. 24. Jn xiii. 31 ; xxi. 19. (Cf. also xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 ; xvii. i, 4.) ^ycVero, followed by /eat. Mt ix. 10. Lk v. i, 12, 17; viii. i, 22; ix. 51; xiv. i; xvii. u; xix. 15; xxiv. 4, 15. Acts v. 7 (?). eyeVero, followed by finite verb. Mt vii. 28; xi. i; xiii. 53; xix. i ; xxvi. i. (In all 5 cases with ore eVe'Xecrei/, after discourses of Jesus.) Mk i. 9 ; iv. 4. Lki. 8, 23, 41, 59; ii. i, 6, 15, 46; vii. ii ; ix. 18, 28, 33, 37 ; xi. i, 14, 27; xvii. 14; xviii. 35; xix. 29; xx. i; xxiv. 30, 5i. eyeVero, followed by infinitive. Mk ii. 23. (Cf. also ytvcrai, Mk ii. 15.) Lk iii. 21. vi. i, 6, 12 ; xvi. 22. 38 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i Acts iv. 5 ; ix. 3, 32, 37, 43 ; xi. 26 ; xiv. i ; xvi. 16 ; xix. i ; xxi. i, 5 ; xxii. 6, 17 ; xxvii. 44 ; xxviii. 8, 17. The total occurrences of e'ycWo in the historical books are Mt 13, Mk 16, Lk 71, Acts 52 (besides eyV 2), Jn 17. We find eyeWo &?' Lk 17, Acts 21 only. Cf. Plummer's note in Int. Crit. Commentary on Luke, p. 45 ; and Dalman's Words of Jesus, E. T., p. 32 ; and J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T., i. 1 6, 70. el Be H^Y 6 * Mt vi. i ; ix. 17. Lk v. 36, 37 ; x. 6 ; xiii. 9 ; xix. 32. 2 Cor xi. 1 6. ct Se /i?; occurs Mk 2, Jn 2, Rev 2. it], optative (see Additional Note, p. 53). Lk i. 29; iii. 15 ; viii. 9 ; ix. 46* : xv. 26*; xviii. 36; xxii. 23. Acts viii. 20; x. 17*; xx. 16; xxi. 33. * With av, see p. 35. elju, &c., with dative. Mt xii. 45 ; xvi. 22 ; xix. 27. Mk xi. 23, 24. Lk i. 14; ii. 7, 10; vi. 32, 33, [34]; vii. 41 ; viii. 30, 42; ix. 13, 38 ; x. 39 ; xii. 20, 24 ; xiv. 10. Acts iv. 32 ; vii. 5, 44; viii. 21 ; x. 6 ; xviii. 10; xxi. 9; xxiv. i o (?), 1 1 ; xxv. 1 6. Rom ix. 2, 9 ; i Cor ix. 16. Jn xviii. 10 ; xix 40. Jam iv. 17; Rev xxi. 7 bis. In this case the classification of instances is uncertain and unsatisfactory, because of the difficulty of determining whether the dative is governed by the verb or by the accompanying noun. Therefore such passages as Lk i. 45; Acts ii. 39 ; xxii. 15 ; Rom ii. 14 ; i Cor i. 18 ; ii. 14 ; xi. 14, 15 ; 2 Cor ix. i ; Phil i. 28 ; iii. 7 are omitted here, though suggested by Bruder, pp. 244-260. But it is clear that this use of the verb substantive is characteristic of Luke and Acts. As is often the case with Lucan characteristics, it is frequent in LXX ; see, e. g., fy and rjo-av in Gen xi. 3 b ; xii. 20 ; . ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 39 xiii. 5; xvi. i ; xxiii. 20; xxiv. 29, 36; xxv. 24; xxix. 16; xxxviii. 27 ; xxxix. 4, 5, 6; xl. 5; xlvii. 26. , after preposition and article. Lk ii. 4, 6 ; v. 12 ; ix. 18 ; xi. i, 8 ; xix. 1 1. Acts xviii. 3 ; xix. i ; xxvii. 4. Rom i. 20; iii. 26; iv. n, 16 ; viii. 29; xv. 16 ; i Cor x. 6; Eph i. 12 ; Phil i. 23. (In Paul always efc TO.) Jn xvii. 5. Jam i. 1 8. Mk xii. 12. Lk vi. 39 ; xii. 16 ; xv. 3 ; xviii. 9 ; xix. n ; xx. 19 ; xxi. 29. CITTCC 8e, ei-iray 8e. [Mt xii. 47 is excluded, being placed in margin by WH and bracketed by Tisch.] Lk i. 13, 34, 38 ; iv. 3, 24 ; vi. 8, 9, 39 ; vii. 48, 50 ; viii. 25 ; ix. 9, 13, 14, 20, 50, 59, 60, 61, 62 ; x. 18, 28; xi, 2, 39; xii. 13, 15, 16,20, 22, 41; xiii. 7,23; xv. 3, n, 21, 22; xvi. 3, 25, 27, 31 ; xvii. i, 6, 22 ; xviii. 6, 9, 19, 26, 28; xix. 9, 19; xx. 13, 41 ; xxii. 36, 52, 60, 67, 70; xxiv. 17, 44. Acts iii. 6 ; v. 3 ; vii. i, 33 ; viii. 29 ; ix. 5, 15 ; x. 4; xi. 12 ; xii. 8; xviii. 9; xix. 4; xxi. 39; xxiii. 20; xxv. 10. (Cf. also flirov &, xi. 8 ; xxii. 10.) Jn xii. 6. (Also in Pericope de Adultera, viii. n.) See some remarks on this usage in Lake, The Resurrection, &c., p. 108. eXdxioroy, neuter without noun. Lk xii. 26; xiv. 10 bis-\ xix. 17. i Cor iv. 3. cXY6P Se, eXeyok Se. Mt xxvi. 5. Mk vii. 20. Lk v. 36* ; ix. 23 ; x. 2 ; xii. 54* ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 7, 12 ; xvi. i* ; xviii. i. Jn vi. 71 ; x. 20. * fie *m. 40 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i f.v JJUOL TWk. Lk v. 12, 17*; viii. 22*; xiii. 10; xx. i*. * fv /ata T>V r)p.epS)i>. Iv rats Yjfxepais raurais. Lk i. 39; vi. 12; xxiii. 7 ; xxiv. 18. (Cf. also i. 24 /iera.) Actsi. 15; vi. i ; xi. 27. (ei> rats 77/1. eKeivais is more usual, viz. Mt 3, Mk 4, Lk 5, Acts 3, Rev 1 ; but of these 16 only 7 are in narrative, viz. Mt iii. i ; Mk i. 9 ; viii. i ; Lk ii. i ; iv. 2 ; ix. 36 ; Acts ix. 37.) Iv TW, with infinitive. Mt xiii. 4, 25 ;. xxvii. 12. Mk iv. 4 ; vi. 48. Lk i. 8, 21 ; ii. 6, 27, 43 ; iii. 21 ; v. i, 12; viii. 5, 40,42 ; ix. 18, 29> 33, 34, 3 6 > 5i; x. 35, 38; xi. 1,27,37; xii. 15; xiv. i ; xvii. n, 14 ; xviii. 35; xix. 15; xxiv. 4, 15, 30, 51. Acts ii. r; iii. 26; iv. 30; viii. 6; ix. 3 ; xi. 15; xix. i. Rom iii. 4 (LXX); xv. 13 ; i Cor xi. 21 ; Gal iv. 18. Heb ii. 8; iii. 12, 15; viii. 13. For (i> TW in LXX see Hatch and Redpath's Concordance, s.v. fv, and for statistics of the 'articular infinitive' in the N. T. generally, J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 216. diro. Mt xii. 43; xv. 22(?); xvii. 18; xxiv. i, 27. Mk xi. 12. Lk iv. 35 bis, 41 ; v. 8 ; viii. 2, 29, 33, 35, 38, 46 ; ix. 5 ; xi. 24 ; xvii. 29. Acts xvi. 1 8, 40; xxviii. 3. i Cor xiv. 36; Phil iv. 15. Jn xiii. 3 ; xvi. 30. Rev xix. 5. Cf. t&pxn (?). (Cf. also xiii. 25.) Acts i. 10. 2 Cor ii. 2. Jam iv. 15 ; Rev xiv. 10 (?). For other cases in Luke, see under eyeVe-ro followed by KCU. KCU aurds, &c. (nominatives). Mt xx. 10 ; xxi. 27; xxv. 44; xxvii. 57. Mk iv. 38 ; vi. 47 ; viii. 29 ; xiv. 15 ; xv. 43. Lk i. 17*, 22*, 36; ii. 28*, 37, 50; iii. 23*; iv. 15*; v.i*, 14*, !7*> 37; vi - 20 *; vii. 12; viii. i*, 22, 42 ; ix. 36, 51*; xi. 46; xiv. i, 12; xv. 14*; xvi. 24*, 28; xvii. n, 13*, 16; xviii. 34; xix. 2&F*, 9; xxii. 23,41; xxiv. 14*, [15], 25, 28, 31, 35, 52. 42 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i Acts viii. 13; xv. 32 ; xxi. 24; xxii. 20; xxiv. 15, 16; xxv. 22; xxvii. 36. Rom viii. 23 bis; xi. 31; xv. 14 bis; Gal ii. 17; Eph iv. n; Phil ii. 24 ; Col i. 17, 18 ; i Thes ii. 14 ; 2 Tim ii. 10. Jn iv. 12, 45; vii. 10; xvii. 8, 19, 21 ; xviii. 28. Heb i. 5; ii. 14; iv. 10; v. 2; viii. 10; xi. n(?); xiii. 3; Jam ii. 6 ; i Pet i. 15 ; ii. 5 ; i Jn ii. 2, 6 ; iv. 13, 15 ; Rev iii. 20 ; vi. ii ; xii. ii ; xiv. 10, 17; xvii. ii; xviii. 6; xix. 15 bis] xxi. 3, 7. It is the use of *at avros where no special emphasis is intended that is specially characteristic of Lk. Instances of this may, I think, be seen in the passages marked * above ; but it is sometimes difficult to decide which cases should be dis- tinguished as emphatic and unemphatic. In the other historical books the only case that can be decidedly called unemphatic is Mk viii. 29. And it is remarkable that there are no such cases in Acts. The preponderance in Lk of the nominatives avros, &c., without Kai is perhaps too slight to be significant ; the numbers in the historical books are Mt 17, Mk 11, Lk 23, Acts 19, Jnl6. KCU OUTOS, &c. (nominatives). Mk iv. 1 6. Lk i. 36 ; ii. 12 ; viii. 13 (?), 41 (?); xvi. i ; xx. 28 ; xxii. 56, 59. Acts xvii. 7. Romxi. 31; i Tim- iii. 10. Jn xvii. 25. Heb xi. 39 ; i Jn iv. 3. Cf. also KCU TOVTO in Rom xiii. 1 1 ; i Cor^vi. 6, 8 ; Eph ii. 8 ; Phil i. 28 ; 3 Jn 5, and ai ravra in Heb xi. 12. KaXoupe^os, with names or appellations. Lk i. 36*; vi. 15; vii. ii ; viii. 2 ; ix, 10; x. 39; xix. 2, 29 ; xxi. 37; xxii. 3; xxiii. 33. Acts i. 12, 23 ; iii. ii ; vii. 58 ; viii. 10* ; ix. ii ; x. i ; xiii. i ; xv. 22, 37; xxvii. 8, 14, 16. Rev i. 9 ; xii. 9; xvi. 16; [xix. ii*]. Always with proper names, except in the three cases marked *. In Heb v. 4 and xi. 8 the meaning is different, viz. ' summoned '. ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 43 ' womb J . Mt xix. 12. Lk i. 15, 41, 42, 44 ; ii. 21 ; xi. 27 ; xxiii. 29. Acts iii. 2 ; xiv. 8. Gal i. 15. Jn iii. 4. In this sense frequent in LXX, but 'very rare in classical Greek ' (Plummer on Lk i. 1 5). Ku'pios, 6, in narrative. Lk vii. 13, 19 ; x. i, 39, 41 ; xii. 42 ; xiii. 15 ; xvii. 5, 6 ; xviii. 6 ; xix. 8; xxii. 61 bis. Jn iv. i ; vi. 23; xi. 2 ; xx. 20; xxi. 12. Also in Appendix to Mk xvi. 19) 20: in the former verse perhaps with 'tyo-ovs, as in the doubtful passage Lk xxiv. 3. It is the constant title in the ' Gospel of Peter ', being used 13 times in the fragment known to us. It is very often used of the risen and ascended Christ in the other books of the N. -T. : perhaps Acts 20, Epistles 46, Rev 2, but it is sometimes difficult to say whether Christ or the Father is referred to. All these are cases in which 6 Kvpios stands alone, not with 'ir/o-oOs or 'l Lk v. 36 ; xii. 41 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 7 ; xviii. i ; xx. 9. Xoyos TOU ecu, 6. Mt xv. 6 (?). Mk vii. 13. Lk v. i; viii. n, 21 ; xi. 28. Acts iv. 31 ; vi. 2, 7 ; viii. 14; xi. i ; xiii. 5, 7, 44 (?), 46, 48 (?) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii. 13; xviii. ii. (Perhaps also xii. 24.) Rom ix. 6 ; i Cor xiv. 36 ; 2 Cor ii. 17 ; iv. 2 ; Phil i. 14 ; Col i. 25 ; i Thes ii. 13 bis ; i Tim iv. 5 ; 2 Tim ii. 9 ; Tit ii. 5. Heb iv. 12 ; xiii. 7 ; i Pet i. 23 ; 2 Pet iii. 5 ; i Jn ii. 14 ; Rev i. 2 ; vi. 9; xix. 13; xx. 4. raura. . viii. i. xxi. i. (Cf. [ATa raura. Lk v. 27 ; x. i ; xii. 4 ; xvii. 8 ; xviii. 4. Acts vii. 7 (LXX); xiii. 20; xv. 16; xviii. i. Jn iii. 22 ; v. i, 14 ; vi. i ; vii. i ; xiii. 7 ; xix. 38 ; fiera TOVTO, ii. 12 ; xi. 7, 1 1 ; xix. 28.) 44 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i Heb iv. 8 ; i Pet i. n ; Rev i. 19 ; iv. i, 2 ; vii. 9; ix. 12 ; xv. 5 ; xviii. i ; xix. i ; xx. 3. (Cf. /*era TOVTO, vii. i.) Also in Appendix to Mk xvi. 12. oticos = ' household ' or ' family '. Ml x. 6 ; xv. 24 (both OIKOU 'lo-pnijA). Lk i. 27, 33, 69 ; ii. 4 ; x. 5 (?) ; xvi. 27 (?) ; xix. 9. Acts ii. 36; vii. 42 (LXX), (both OIKOS 'loyjaqX); x. 2; xi. 14; xvi. 15, 31 ; xviii. 8. i Cor i. 16; i Tim iii. 4, 5, 12; v. 4; 2 Tim i. 16; iv. 19; Tit i. ii. Heb viii. 8 bis (LXX), 10 (LXX, all three of Israel and Judah) ; xi. 7. oVojma, nom., in ' whose name was ', &c. Mt xxvii. 57 (rovvopa, perhaps an accusative). Mk xiv. 32. Lk i. 5, 26, 27 bis] ii. 25 ; viii. 41 ; xxiv. 13. Acts xiii. 6. Jn i. 6 ; iii. i ; xviii. 10. Rev vi. 8; viii. 1 1 ; ix. ii. = by name. Mt xxvii. 32. Mk v. 22. Lk i. 5 ; v. 27 ; x. 38 ; xvi. 20; xix. 2 (with KaKovpevos) ; xxiii. 50; xxix. 18. Actsv. i, 34; viii. 9; ix. 10, IT, 12, 33, 36; x. i; xi. 28; xii. 13 ; .xvi. i, 14 ; xvii. 34; xviii. 2, 7, 24 ; xix. 24 ; xx. 9 ; xxi. 10 ; xxvii. i ; xxviii. 7. 05, in attraction. Mt xviii. 19 ; xxiv. 50. Mk vii. 13. Lki. 4; ii. 20*; iii. 19*; v. 9 (?) ; ix. 36, 43*; xii. 46; xv. 16 ; xix. 37*; xxiii. 41; xxiv. 25*. Acts i. i*, 22; ii. 22; iii. 21*, 25; vii. 16, 17, 45; viii. 24; ix. 36 ; x. 39* ; xiii. 39* ; xvii. 31 ; xx. 38 ; xxi. 19, 24 ; xxii. 10*, 15 ; xxiv. 21 ; xxv. 18 ; xxvi. 2, 16, 22. Rom iv. 17 ; xv. 18 ; i Cor vi. 19 ; vii. i, 39 ; 2 Cor i. 4, 6 ; x. 8, 13; xii. 17, 21 ; Eph i. 6, 8; ii. 10; iii. 20; iv. i; 2 Thes i. 4 ; Tit iii. 6. . ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 45 Jniv. 14; vii. 31, 39(?); xv. 20; xvii. 5 (?), 9, 1 1 ; xxi. 10. Heb v. 8; vi. 10; ix. 20 (LXX); Jam ii. 5; i Pet iv. n; 2 Pet ii. 12 ; i Jn iii. 24 ; Jude 15 bis\ Rev xviii. 6. The only ' attraction ' here considered is that of the relative pronoun to a noun (expressed or understood). On the various kinds of attraction see Winer, xxiv. 1-3. * In these cases with navrav, naa-cov, or Trao-iv: cf. also Jude 15. ouxt, d\Xd. Lk i. 60; xii. 51 ; xiii. 3, 5 ; xvi. 30. Rom iii. 27 ; i Cor x. 29. Jn ix. 9. irapci = beyond. Lk iii. 13; xiii. 2, 4; xviii. 14 (but with some doubt as to the text). Rom i. 25; iv. 18 ; xii. 3 ; xiv. 5 ; i Cor iii. ii ; 2 Cor viii. 3; Gal i. 8, 9 (see Lightfoot, in foe.). Heb i. 4, 9 ; ii. 7, 9 ; iii. 3 ; ix. 23 ; xi. 4, 1 1 ; xii. 24. Acts xviii. 13 ; Rom i. 26; xi. 24; xvi. 17 are omitted, because the sense seems rather to be ' contrary to ' ; and this may possibly be the case also as to one or two of the cases given above from the Epistles. irapd TOUS iroSas. Mt xv. 30. Lk vii. 38 ; viii. 35, 41 ; xvii. 16. Acts iv. 35, 37 ; v. 2 ; vii. 58 ; xxii. 3. Cf. irpbs TOVS nodas Mk 2, Lk 1, Acts 1, Jll 1, Rev 1. Trds, or aims, 6 Xaos. Mt xxvii. 25. Lk ii. 10; iii. 21*; vii. 29; viii. 47; ix. 13; xviii. 43; xix. 48*; xx. 6*; xxi. 38; xxiv. 19. Acts iii. 9, ii ; iv. iof; v. 34; x. 41 ; xiii. 241% Heb ix. 19. Also in P eric ope de Adultera^ Jn viii. 2. arras. "\" nets 6 Xaos ' irpos, used of speaking to. Mk iv. 41*; x. 26 ; xii. 7*; xv. 31*; xvi. 3*. (xii. 12 is excluded.) Lk i. 13, 1 8, 19, 34, 55, 61; ii. 15*, 18, 20, 34, 48, 49; iii. 12, 46 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i 13; iv. 4, 21, 23, 36*, 43; v. 4, 10, 22, 31, 33, 34, 36; vi. 3, 9, ii- vii. 24, 40, 50; viii. 21, 22, 25*; ix. 3, 13, 14, 23, 33, 43, 50, 57> 59> f 62 ] ; x - 2, 26, 2 9 J xi. i, 5, 39 J xii - i 3 ( ? )> '61 16, 22, 41 for (?); xiii. 7, 23; xiv. 3, 5, 7 foj, 23, 25; xv. 3, 22 ; xvi. i; xvii. i, 22; xviii. 9, 31 ; xix. 5, 8, 9, 13, 33, 39; xx. 2, 3, 9, 23, 25, 41 ; xxii. 15, 52, 70 ; xxiii. 4, 14, 22 ; xxiv. 5, 10, 14*, 17, 18, 25, 32, 44. (i. 28 and xx. 19 are excluded.) Actsi. 7; ii. 12, 29, 37, gSt; iii. 12, 22, 25; iv. i, 8, 19, 23; v. 8, 9t, 35; vii. 3; viii. 20, 26; ix. 10, lit, 15; x. 28; xi. 14, 20; xii. 8, 15, 21 (?); xv. 7, 36; xvi. 37; xviii. 6, 14; xix. 2, 2t; xxi. 37, 39; xxii. 8, 10, 21, 25; xxiii. 3 ; xxv. 16, 22t; xxvi. i, 14, 26, 28t, 31*; xxviii. 4*, 17, 21, 25. (xxiii. 30 is excluded.) Rom x. 21 ; i Thes ii. 2. Jn ii. 3 ; iii. 4 ; iv. 15, 33*, 48, 49 ; vi. 5, 28, 34 ; vii. 3, 35*, 50 ; viii. 31, 33, 57 ; xi. 21 ; xii. 19* ; xvi. 17* ; xix. 24*. Heb v. 5 ; vii. 21 (?) ; 2 Jn 12 (?) ; 3 Jn 14 (?)- (Heb i. 7, 8, 13 ; xi. 1 8 are excluded.) In Mt iii. 15 WH mg and Tisch have eiTrei/ Trpos avrov. * irpbs aX\r)\ovs, eavrovs, cavrds. t In these 6 Cases in Acts the verb is understood, not expressed. eis. Mt vii. 6 (o-TpatpfVTe s) ', ix. 22 ; xvi. 23. Lk vii. 9, 44 ; ix. 55 ; x. 23; xiv. 25 ; xxii. 61 ; xxiii. 28. Jn i. 38 ; XX. l6 (orpa^eio-a). Always used of Jesus, except in Mt vii. 6 and Jn xx. 16. Mk, who never uses arpafais, has fniarpafpfls twice (v. 30 ; viii. 33) ; Jn also has it in xxi. 22. TI'S ; with optative (see Additional Note, p. 53). Mk viii. 37(?). Lk i. 62; vi. ii viii. 9; ix. 46; xv. 26 ; xviii. 36; xxii. 23. Acts v. 24; x. 17 ; xvii. 18 ; xxi. 33. Mk viii. 37 is more probably a subjunctive. So Swete and Gould, in /oc., WH Notes, p. 168, and Moulton's note on Winer, p. 360. TIS e upwf ; Mt vi. 27 ; vii. 9 (with avQpowos). Lk xi. 5; xii. 25; xiv. 28; xv. 4 (with aftfpwTros) ; xvii. 7. (Cf. xi. 1 1 Tiva ( vfjLo>f ', and xiv. 5 TWOS v/io>i> ;) . ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 47 TIS, with nouns. Mt xviii. 12. (Contrast his more frequent use of ds with nouns, P- 30-) Mk xiv. 51 ; xv. 21. Lk i. 5; vii. 2, 41 ; viii. 2, 27 (?) ; ix. 8, 19 ; x. 25, 30, 31, 33, 38 bis; xi. i, 27, 36; xii. 4, 16 ; xiii. 31 ; xiv. 2, 16; xv. n ; xvi. i, 19, 20; xvii. 12; xviii. 2, 18, 35; xix. 12; xxi. 2; xxii. 56, 59 (aXXoy TIS); xxiii. 8, 19, 26 ; xxiv. 22, 41. Acts iii. 2 ; v. i, 2 ; viii. 9 w, 34 (-'pov riwSs), 36 ; ix. 10, 19*, 33, 36, 43; x. i, 5, 6, u, 48*; xi. 5; xiii. 6, 15; xiv. 8 ; xv. 2 (TIWW aXAous), 36* ; xvi. i, 9, 12*, 14, 16 ; xvii. 5, 6, 20, 21, 34; xviii. 2, 14, 23, 24; xix. i, 14, 24, 32 (XXo ); xx. 9; xxi. 10 (?), 16, 34(aXAoTi); xxii. 12; xxiv. i bis t 18, 24* ; xxv. 13*, 14, 16, 19 foj, 26 ; xxvii. i, 8, 16, 26, 27, 39 ; xxviii. 3. Rom i. n, 13; viii. 39; ix. n ; xiii. 9 ; xv. 26; i Cor i. 16 (TWI aXAoi/) ; vii. 12 ; ix. 12 ; xi. 18 ; xiv. 24 ; xvi. 7 ; 2 Cor x. 8 ; xi. i, 1 6 ; Gal vi. i ; Eph vi. 8 ; Phil ii. i quater ; iii. 4 (TIS . . . oXXos) ; iv. 8 bis ; Col ii. 23 ; i Tim v. 4, 16, 24. Jn i. 46 ; iv. 46 ; v. 5, 14 ; xi. i ; xii. 20 ; xxi. 5. Heb ii. 7, 9 (both LXX) ; iv. 7 ; x. 27 ; xi. 40 ; xii. 15 (LXX), 16; Jam i. 1 8 ; v. 12 ; Jude 4. * With fjfjiepai. in these 6 places only. Some adjectives as well as substantives are here included under ' nouns '. TIS is also used with ds in Lk xxii. 50 ; Jn xi. 49 ; and perhaps in Mk xiv. 47, 51; and with 8vo in Lk vii. 19; Acts xxiii. 23. TO before the interrogative TIS or TI ; Lk i. 62; ix. 46; xix. 48; xxii. 23, 24. Acts xxii. 30. Rom viii. 26. And there is a similar use of TO before nws in Lk xxii. 2,4; Acts iv. 21. Cf. also i Thes iv. i. TO, Tof3eojAcu, used of fearing God. Mt x. 28. Lk i. 50; xii. 5 bis ; xviii. 2, 4 ; xxiii. 40. Acts x. 2, 22, 35 ; xiii. 16, 26. Col iii. 22 (where, however, TOV Kvpiov, not rov Qfov, is the better reading). Rev xiv. 7 ; xix. 5. (Cf. also xv. 4.) fyuvri, with ytkojxai. Mk i. 1 1 (?). Lki. 44; iii. 22; ix. 35, 36. Acts ii. 6; vii. 31 ; x. 13 ; xix. 34. (Cf. also ii. 2 fo f -) Jn xii. 30. Rev viii. 5 ; xi. 15, (19) ; (xvi. 18). Plural in Rev. Xis; ii. 17, 1 8, 28; iii. i (?) ; iv. 4 bis (?), 10 ; Col i. 24; ii. 5 ; i Thes iii. 9 ; v. 16. Jn iii. 29; iv. 36 ; viii. 56; xi. 15 ; xiv. 28 ; xvi. 20, 22 ; xx. 20. i Pet iv. 13 ; 2 Jn 4 ; 3 Jn 3 ; Rev xi. 10; xix. 7. Bp. Lightfoot renders ' farewell ' in Phil iii. i, and suggests a combination of the two senses in iv. 4. Cf. fvtypaivti) on p. 19 above. And see Harnack, Acts of App., Excursus III (E. T., pp. 277 ff.). ws = ' when '. Mk ix. 21. Lk i. 23, 41, 44 ; ii. 15, 39 ; iv. 25 ; v. 4 ; vii. 12 ; xi. i ; xii. 58 ; xv. 25; xix. 5, 29, 41; xx. 37 (?); xxii. 66; xxiii. 26; xxiv. 32 bis. Acts i. 10 ; v. 24; vii. 23; viii. 36; ix. 23 ; x. 7, 17,25; xiii. 25, HAWKINS E 50 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i 29; xiv. 5; xvi. 4, 10, 15; xvii. 13; xviii. 5; xix. 9, 21; xx. 14, 18; xxi. i, 12, 27; xxii. n, 25; xxv. 14; xxvii. 1,27; xxviii. 4. Rom xv. 24 ; i Cor xi. 34 ; Phil ii. 23 : with &v in all three cases. Jn ii. 9, 23; iv. i, 40; vi. 12, 16; vii. 10; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32, 33; xviii. 6 ; xix. 33 ; xx. 1 1 ; xxi. 9. (Also in Pericope de Adultera, viii. 7.) In some of these cases o>? can be best rendered by ' as ', but in all of them there is some reference to time. Harnack (Sayings of Jesus, E. T., p. 160) observes that such 'temporal clauses with $ are entirely absent from' the passages which he assigns to ' Q '. 6, &c., with words inserted between the article and noun. Mt vii. 3. Mk iv. 19 ; v. 26 ; vi. 36. Lk i. 70; vi. 42 ; ix. 12, 37; xvi. 10, 15; xix. 30. Acts v. 16; viii. 14; x. 45; xiii. 42; xv. 23; xvi. 2; xvii. 13, 28; xix. 25, 38; xx. 21, 26; xxi. 21, 27; xxii. i; xxiii. 21; xxv. 27; xxvi. 3, ii ; xxvii. 2. Rom i. 12; ii. 27 bis ; iii. 26; iv. 12; vii. .22; viii. 18; ix. ii, 25 (LXX); xi. 5, 8, 21, 27 ; xvi. 5, 14, 15; i Cor iv. ii ; vi. 19; xvi. 19; 2 Cor i. n ; iv. 16 ; vii. 10 bis; viii. 2, 7, 14; ix. 2; xii. ii ; Gal i. 2, 17; iv. 25, 26; Eph i. 15; iii. 16 ; Phil ii. 30 bis; iii. 14; iv. 21 ; Col i. 2; ii. 5, 14; iii. 22; iv. 15 bis; i Tim iv. 14; v. 3, 5, 16 ; vi. 3, 19; 2 Tim i. 3, 5; iv. 9; Tit i. 9; ii. 12; iii. 15; Phileni2. Jn ix. 13. Heb ii. 2 ; ix. 15; x. 32 ; xi. 7 ; Jam iii. 17; i Pet i. ii ter, 14 ; iii. 2, 3, 15, 16, 19; iv. 2, 8, 12; v. 2, 9; 2 Pet i. 4, 9; ii. 7, 13 ; iii. 6, 7, 10 ; Jude 7 ; Rev ii. 12 (?) ; iii. i (?), 7 (?), 14 (?) ; v. 13; xvii. i4(?). This list, mainly derived from Bruder, p. 598, might perhaps be enlarged. Adjectives agreeing with the substantive are not included among the ' words inserted ', nor are conjunc- tions and particles. r)|j.e'pa with Lk iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii. 66. Acts xii. 18; xv. 35; xxiii. 12 ; xxvii. 29, 33, 39. Appx.ii.Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 51 TroXiK or iroXeis after K PP- 35 f- > besides the usual Grammars (J. H. Moulton's figures slightly differ from the above, Gr., i. 227). Additional Note on IXcyei/, cXeyoi' (p. 12). The extremely few 1 occurrences of these imperfects in LXX are as follows : IXey/ or eAeyt is found in Judg xix. 30 ; 2 Ki xv. 2 ; xvi. 7 ; [3 Ki iii. 22 ;] 2 Chro xx. 2 1 ; i Esdr viii. 70 (74) ; [Esther ii. 15 ; iii. 4 ;] Job i. 5 ; [Tobit x. 6 ;] 2 Mace iii. 13 ; xiv. 26 ; xv. 22; 4 Mace iv. 2, 6, 12; ix. 28; xi. 12, 20; xiii. u, 12; xviii. 6, 12 (23 cases). And the plural eXeyov is found in Gen xix. 5; Numbxxxii. 5, 16 ; Deut i. 25; [Judg xviii. 8 ;] i Ki xii. 10; xviii. 7 ; xix. 24 ; 2 Chro v. 13 ; Prov iv. 4 ; Is vi. 3 ; Jer xlv. 22 ; Dan Theod vii. 5 ; 4 Mace vi. 13 ; xiii. 13, 18; xvii. i (17 cases). The five cases enclosed in square brackets are not found in the B-text. Pss Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15 and xciii. (xciv.) 16 and 2 Mace iv. 47 were purposely omitted as conditional sentences ; and 4 Mace xvi. 15 as being a mere mistake for eXfyes-. The above list of (23 + 17 =) 40 cases is of interest as showing in the later books, as compared with the earlier, the gradual loss on the whole (for Numb xxxii. 5, 16; Deut i. 25 may be exceptions) of the ' imperfect ' sense of continuity or repetition in eXeyei/ and c \fyov in narrative. It is to be remembered as to 4 Mace, in which 14 out of the 40 instances are found, that according to the latest and best authority it ' must be placed at the close of the first century of our era' (Thackeray, Gram, of 0. T. in Greek, p. 6). Compare the use of e^, mentioned in the preceding note. Additional Note on oupayos and oupavoi (p. 30). The singular and plural are used as ' follows by the various writers in the New Testament. It will be seen that Matthew, Hebrews, and 2 Peter are the only books in which the plural is more frequent than the singular ; but in the Pauline Epistles they are almost equal. 1 Extremely few in comparison with ftwcv, &c., as maybe seen by glancing at the 50 columns occupied by tltrtiv in Hatch and Redpath's Concordance. Add. Notes of each of the Synoptic Gospels 53 it 2 i 3 Mt Mk Lk Acts Paul Jn Heb Jam i Pet 2 Pet Jn Rev ovpuVoa 271231241118 3 2 2 I O 51 ovpavoi 55 542 10 070150 I The one case in Rev is xii. 12, a quotation from or reminis- cence of LXX, in which ovpavoi occurs 4 times with (vtypaivciv, viz. Deut xxxii. 43; Ps xcv. n; Is xliv. 23; xlix. 13 (eixpp. is also found with the singular in i Chro xvi. 31 ; Is xlv. 8). The plural is not frequent in LXX : it only occurs about 50 times against more than 600 occurrences of the singular. It is least uncommon in the Psalms, where it is used about 30 times, and the singular about 50 times. Additional Note on the use of the Optative Mood. Besides the 17 (? 18) instances of the optative which have been entered once or more under the headings of av (p. 35\ c"rj (p. 38), and r/V (p. 46), the only cases of that mood in the historical books are Mk xi. 14 (dyoi, see p. 133), Lk i. 38 (ye'i/otro) and XX. l6 (/u?) ye'i/oiro), and Acts xvii. n, 2*1 bis, xxiv. 19, xxv. i6bis, 20, xxvii. 12, 39 (the last two cases being in a ' We-Section '). When we add together all these occurrences of optative forms, they amount to Mt 0, Mk 1 (?2), Lk 11, Acts 17, Jn a remarkable result. In the Epistles there are about 34 instances, of which the Pauline exclamation /u?) yeVon-o supplies 14. It is well known that the optative was obsolescent in the ordinary Greek of N. T. times. PART II INDICATIONS OF SOURCES SECTION I IDENTITIES IN LANGUAGE THESE are so numerous and so close, and in many cases they contain constructions or words which are so very unusual or even peculiar, that the use of written Greek documents is prima facie suggested by them. Certainly they throw very serious difficulties in the way of an exclusively 'oral theory'. 1 And, so far as they extend, they render the hypothesis of independent translations 3 1 They would make such a theory impossible if we did not know that the memories of teachers and learners were trained and cultivated in Judaea to an extent far beyond anything within our own experience. See Schiirer, Hist, of Jewish People, II. i. 324 (E. T.) ; and Schiller-Szinessy on the Mishnah in Enc. Brit., xvi. 504. Some interesting parallels and illustrations from the East may be seen in Driver's Genesis, p. xliv ; Max Muller's Last Essays, Series I, pp. 122-37 > Geden's Studies in Eastern Religions, pp. 13, 26, 251. And there is a western parallel in Caesar's account (B. G., vi. 14) of the exclusively oral teaching of ' a great number of verses' by the Druids, referred to by York Powell (Life, ii. 242), who thought that ' in these days of print we are apt to undervalue the possibilities of human memory' (ib. i. 206). But it may be doubted whether the matter committed to memory in these cases was often parallel in kind to the contents of our historical Gospels ; see Burkitt, The Gospel History, &c., p. 145. 2 The past tense used by Papias (fofdpHnur* o' avra cliy fy Swards eVatrroj, see p. xiii above) tells us that such independent translations of the Matthaean Logia had been made at first, but does not say that they continued in use during his own time (and we must remember that Eusebius may be giving us but a very small and incomplete fragment of what Papias wrote). Josephus tells us at the beginning of his Jewish War that he himself trans- lated it into Greek, after writing it in the language of his country (TT) irarp'up). And i Mace 'was written originally in Hebrew (or Aramaic)', though 'it has come down to us only in the form of a Greek translation, which was probably in existence as early as the time of Josephus ' (Schiirer, op. cit., II. iii. 8f.). So there may have been similarly an early and generally accepted translation of the Logia. 1 Identities in Language 55 from the Logia, or from any other Aramaic source, ex- tremely improbable. These identities are of three kinds (A, B. C) : A. In the construction of sentences. (i) In Mark, Matthew, and Luke (Mark is placed first, as being admittedly the oldest document) : i. Mk ii. IO Iva 5e (IdrJTf xrX. Xe'yei rw irapa- 2ot Xe'yeo, KT\. eyetpe Mt ix. 6 Iva 8e fldfJTe KT\. rdre Xeyei r TT a pa\vT (,<(>' eyeipe KrX. Lk v. 24 KrA. fi TO) Trapa- 2. Mk iii. 19 Kctl 'Iov8av nap- a\JTQV. Mt X. 4 feat 'lou^as 6 8ovs avrov. KT\. Lk vi. 1 6 eat 'lou )^, 6s cycvcro Observe also in Mk xiv. 10; Mt xxvi. 14; Lk xxii. 3, and again in Mk xiv. 43; Mt xxvi. 47; Lk xxii. 47 the repetition of the fact that Judas was ( one of the twelve ' or ' of the number of the twelve '. Mk xii. 14; Lk xx. 21 eV aX??- Mt xxii. 16 rfjv 68bv roC O*oC jy 666r rov 0eoO a\r]6ciq 8i8d (ii) In Mark and Matthew : Mk i. 1 6 ; Mt iv. 18 rjaavyap aXeels. 2 1 . Mk V. KrX. Mt IX. 21 e'Xeyfy yap eV favrfj } 'Ecu/ yap OTL 'Ecu/ a\l/w- a^cufjLai KT\. Parenthetical additions of explanations. 56 Indications of Sources pt. ii Mk viii. 2 ; Mt XV. 32 r}8r] fjfifpai Tpels npoo-ufvovo-iv fioi KT\. On the construction see Winer's Grammar, Ixii. 2 and note ; Blass, p. 85; J. H. Moulton, i. 70. In Mk WH mg has ialv with B onl. 4- Mk xiii. 14; Mt Xxiv. 156 dvayivwo-Kwv vofiTti). 5 1 - Mk xiy. 2 ehfyov ydp } Mi] cv rfi foprft, fJLTjrroTe carat 0dpvj3os TOV \aov. Mt XXVi. 5 fXeyof oV, Mr) cv rrj fOpTrj, Iva p.f] 66pv/3os yfvrjrai (V TOJ Xaa>. 6 1 . Mk XV. IO (i yap ort ia bOovov napadedwKfio'av avrbv oi Mt XXVii. 1 8 rjdd yap on 8ta (iii) In Mark and Luke : Mk i. 7 ^ ^ K *'/** iKavbs \vo~ai TOV IfiavTa T)V v Lk iii. 1 6 ov OVK dp\ IKOVOS \vtrai rov Ifj-avni TO>V vnoorjpdTwv avrov. [But D and other Western authorities omit Cf. also Jn i. 27. The only other instances of this construc- tion (ou . . . avrov) seem to be Mk vii. 25 ; Acts xv. 17; [i Pet ii. 24 Tisch but not WH or R ;] Rev iii. 8 ; vii. 2, 9 ; xiii. 8, 12 ; xx. 8. See Blass's Gram., p. 175, and J. H. Moulton's, i. 94, 237. Lk viii. 29 irapr)yye\\v yap TO) aKaQapTO) OTTO TOV dv0a>7rov. Mk V. 8 (\fyev yap TO TTVei'fJM TO aKadapTOV K TOV- dvQpwTrov. The appeal of the demons having been first recorded, the cause of it is thus added afterwards, in both Gospels. 1 Parenthetical additions of explanations. Also notice r\v ydp KT\. in Mk x. 22, Mt xix. 22, and (though not with identical words following) Lk xviii. 23. i Identities in Language 57 (iv) In Matthew and Luke : i. Mt Vil. 3 TT)V 8f CV TW (TO) 0 crov Such an insertion of words between the article and its noun is found here only in Matthew, but 3 times in Mark, and frequently in Luke, Acts, and other books. See pp. 27 and 50. B. In single words and short phrases. 1 (i) In Mark, Matthew, and Luke : i. ipdfi Mkii. 20; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 35. or anaipopai here only in N. T. : but the active dnaipo) is frequent in LXX. 2. Mk ii. 21 ; Mt ix. 1 6 ; Lk v. 36 bis. Here only in N. T. : LXX 1. Used in Classical Greek of a cloak or of hangings, not of a patch. 3- Mk ii. 23 ; Mt xii. i ; Lk vi. i. here only in N. T. : LXX 4. 4- ri\\ovTfs Mk ii. 23 ; TiXXett- Mt xii. i ; ertXXov Lk vi. i. n'AXw here only in N. T. : LXX 3. In Greek generally, rt'XXo> is used of hair, fy>e'rro> of flowers and fruit. 1 As a rule, the identities in language which seem to the compiler most remarkable have been placed first in the following lists. But this rule has not been uniformly observed, for it has been thought best to group together instances taken from the same passage, e.g. the two from Mk ii. 20, 21, and the four from Mk viii. 3-7. The appended notes draw attention to the rarity of the word, and to the consequent degree of unlikelihood that any- thing but a common written origin can account for its use in more than one Gospel. In these notes, as elsewhere, the figures printed in thick type denote that the word or phrase occurs so many times in the New Test, or its various books, or in the Septuagint. 58 Indications of Sources pt. n irtpov 5- ( Mk ii. 9 ; Mt ix. 5; Lk v. 23. only once besides in N. T. (evKomarcpov Lk xvi. 1 7) : LXX 2. Apparently not common in Classical Greek. 6. Mk x. 23 ; Mt xix. 23 ; Lk xviii. 24. The adverb here only in N. T. : 8vo-Ko\os only in the following verse of Mark: LXX 1. But both adjective and adverb are in classical use. 7- 68oi> (rov Mk i. 2 ; Mt xi. io ', Lk vii. 27. In quotation from Mai iii. i where LXX has eVi/SAe'^n-ai. Karao-Kcvafa also Lk 1, Heb 6, i Pet 1, LXX 30, but nowhere with 6d6s or any similar word. 8. Mk viii. 36 ; fy/u^// Mt xvi. 26 ; ^iwBfis Lk ix. 25. o> elsewhere only Paul 3 ; LXX 7. 9- rm Mk xii. 6 ; Mt xxi. 37 ; Lk xx. 13. elsewhere in this sense with ace. only Lk 2, Heb 1, and LXX about 6 times. io. v avrov Mk v. 40 ; Mt ix. 24 : Lk viii. 53. o) here only in N. T. : LXX about 22. ii. ou pr] y(vVTTt'oi>, and ovs respectively. dv Mk xiv. 43, 48 ; Mt xxvi. 47, 55 ; Lk xxii. 52. in this sense here only in N. T. : and very rare in LXX, and paKTrjpta being the usual words : see, however, 2 Ki xxiii. 21; Is x. 15; also 2 Ki xxi. 19; xxiii. 7; i Chro xx. 5 of the staff of a spear. 14. v/x&n/ Mk ix. 19 ; Mt xvii. 17 ; Lk ix. 41. Here only in Gospels : but Acts 1, Paul 10, Heb 1 : LXX 12. is*. viol TOV vvp(pa)vos Mk ii. 19; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 34. wfjifpav here and Mt xxii. 10 (?) only in N. T. : in LXX only Tobit 2. I6 1 . ee'6ero Mk xii. I ; Mt xxi. 33 ; Lk XX. 9 ; also eK&BO-erat Mt xxi. 41. tie&tdo/Mu here only in N. T. : LXX 18, but not in this sense of 'letting out', which, however, is classical (Swete on Mk xii. i). The unusual grammatical form e&6ro (see WH, Notes, pp. 167 f.) occurs in the A-text of Ex ii. 21 and i Mace x. 58 : it is also paralleled in the papyri (J. H. Moulton, Gram., i- 55)- V*. Ka.Tao-Krjvo'iv Mk IV. 32 ; Mt xiii. 32 j KaTfa-KrjvaHrev Lk xiii. 19. KdTCKTKrjvoa) besides in N. T. only Acts ii. 26 from LXX : in LXX it is very frequent. 1 These three words or phrases being such as would be required, or at least such as would be naturally suggested, by the subject-matter, not much stress is laid upon them. 60 Indications of Sources pt. n (ii) In Mark and Matthew l : i. KctTtov(Tidovaiv avrwv Mk X. 42 ; Mt XX. 25. a'a> is not quoted as occurring anywhere else. 2. Mk vii. 13 ; Mt xv. 6. co besides in N. T. only Gal iii. 17. In LXX 7 (6 of the cases being in 2 Mace) ; and several times in the fragments of the other Greek versions. 3- Mk vii. 27 ; Mt xv. 26; Kvvdpia Mk vii. 28 ; Mt xv. 27. here only in N. T. , and never in LXX. 4- OTTO Ta)i> \lfixiwv Mk vii. 28 ; Mt xv. 27. tytxtov here only in N. T. : never in LXX or in Classical Greek. 5- Mk viii. 3 ; Mt xv. 32. vf) Mk viii. 3 ; (K\v8)(nv ev rfj 65<5 Mt XV. 32. eVXuo) besides also Paul 1, Heb 2: frequent in LXX, and about 8 times in exactly the same sense as here. 7 tay Mk viii. 4 ; (v eprjfjiia Mt XV. 33. ia here only in Gospels, and Paul 1, Heb 1 : LXX 7. In N. T. eprjuos TO'TTO? and jj ep^/zoy are the usual forms. 8. Mk viii. 7 ; Mt xv. 34. here only in N. T., and never in LXX. 9- Mk xiv. 2O ; 6 cupfyas Mt XXVI. 23. here only in N. T., and never in LXX. 1 It would be very easy to lengthen this list. Identities in Language 6r ? TO rpu/SlXioj/ Mk XIV. 2O ; eV r< Tpuj3Xto> Mt XXvi. 23. here only in N. T. : LXX 19. ii. p.v\os OVIKOS Mk ix. 42 ; Mt xviii. 6. o'ff here only in N. T. and never in LXX or elsewhere. But J. Lightfoot (quoted by Swete on Mk) and others show that there was a Jewish phrase of which this would be an obvious rendering. (See Enc. Bill., iii. 3094.) And the word itself occurs in the papyri cited as BU 913 (ist century A. D.). 12. Mk xiii. 2O bis ; e'oAo/3u>$/7(rai>, Ko\o/3(a6f)(rovTai Mt xxiv. 22. KoAo/3oa> here only in N. T. : LXX 1, but more frequent in the fragments of the other Greek versions. vfuv Mk xiii. 23 ; Mt xxiv. 25. S) here only in Gospels : Paul 4, Heb 1 (?), 2 Pet 1, Jude 1 : LXX 12. 14. dvTa\\ayfj.a Mk viii. 37 ; Mt xvi. 26. Here only in N. T. : LXX 10. The parallel in Sir xxvi. 14 is remarkable. 15- vviv at dvva/j.fis ft* niro) Mk VI. 14 ; m dwafifif evfpyovaiv fv aura Mt xiv. 2. fo) here only in Gospels, but in Epistles 18 : LXX 7. 1 6. ls Mk viii. 33; Mt xvi. 23. w here only in Gospels ; but Acts 1, Paul 23 : LXX 15. e'/i^s KOI aKoas TroXe/xwi/ Mk xiii. 7 ; Mt xxiv. 6. In this sense, the plural dicoca' here only in N. T., and LXX 2. 62 Indications of Sources Pt. n 18. pi>r)fji6(rvvov Mk xiv. 9 ; Mt xxvi. 13. Besides this, in N. T. only Acts x. 4. But LXX 70 : so it is perhaps the obvious word here ; cf. e. g. Ex xvii. 14 LXX. 19. o-uXXa|3eii> fie Mk xiv. 48 ; Mt xxvi. 55. avXXa/Lt/3aj/a> here only in Mark and Matthew ; but also in this sense Lk 2, Jn 1, Acts 4, and frequently in LXX. 20. rrpoa-\a^6fjii>os avrov Mk Vlii. 32 ; Mt xvi. 22. 7rpoffXa/u/3ai/< here only in Gospels ; also Acts 5, Paul 5, and LXX 8, but never with exactly this meaning. 21. fjSrj &pas iro\\rjs yfi>op.fi>T]S * . . 77877 &pa no\\r) Mk vi. 35 ; f) wpa fj8r) irapri\6fv Mt xiv. 15. &pa, with this meaning of ' daytime ', apparently here only in N.T. (cf., however, Mk xi. n). 22. ou j3X7ret? fls Trpoffairov Mk xii. 14; Mt xxii. 1 6. Here only in N. T., and not in LXX, for i Sam xvi. 7 is not an exact parallel. Lk has the more usual ov \appdvcis irpov- (Gal ii. 6 and LXX). 23- Mk xiv. 13 ; Mt xxvi. 37. eo) in N. T. only here and Phil ii. 26. Not in LXX, but Aq. and Symm. (iii) In Mark and Luke : T. Mk V. 15 ; Lk viii. 35. iparifo here only in N. T. : not in LXX, nor elsewhere. 2. vvTa Mk v. 15 ; Lk viii. 35. \(6s here only in N. T. : not in LXX. 3- Mt viii. 2o ; Lk ix. 58. here only in N. T. : LXX 5, but always of the temple or of the Divine Presence. 64 Indications of Sources pt. n 4- cv ycvvriTois yvvatK&v Mt xi. II ; Lk vii. 28. ywr)Tos never elsewhere in N. T. : in LXX only ycvv^To^ ywainos Job 5. 5,6*. Ktipfos, SoKoV, each 3 times in Mt vii. 3-5 ; Lk vi. 41, 42. Both here only in N. T. : in LXX Kdpfos 1, 8o<6s 1O. 7 1 - SiajSAe'^ei? Mt vii. 5 ; Lk vi. 42. 8ta/3XcVa) besides in N. T. only Mk viii. 25 : not in LXX. 8. an\oi>s Mt vi. 22 ; Lk xi. 34. Here only in N. T. : LXX 1, but more frequent in Aq., Symm., Theod. 9- Tiv6i> Mt vi. 22 ; Lk xi. 34 ; also 36 bis. 6s besides in N. T. only Mt xvii. 5 : LXX 2. 10. v Mt vi. 23 ; Lk xi. 34 ; also 36. here only in N. T. : LXX. 16. ii. crtpfi>uv Mt xii. 44 Lk xi. 25. o-a/306a besides in N. T. only Lk xv. 8 : not in LXX. 12. IKOVOS tva . . . ctv Mt X. 28 ; Lk Xli. 4. (po^fofiai dno here only in N. T. : but in LXX 49 times (25 of them with H-poo-owou) out of about 440 occurrences of the verb. 1 It is'remarkable thaf in this list these are the only cases found in the Sermons on the Mount and on the Level Place. i Identities in Language 65 14. fV f'/zoi . . . o/ioXoy/yo-o) Koyoo (Lk 6 vlos TOV avQpanov 6po- ev (ivra, Mt X. 32 ; Lk xii. 8. 6/ioXoy/a> eV here only in N. T. (for the sense is different in Rom x. 9) ; and not in LXX. See J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 104, and Allen on Mt x. 32. Iva fj,ov vno rrjv o-Ttyrjv elrreXdys Mt viii. 8 ; tva vno rr\v a-rcy>]v flffeXQys Lk vii. 6. eyri besides in N. T. only Mk ii. 4 : LXX 5. 16. dire Xdyw Mt viii. 8 ; Lk vii. 7. There seems to be no close parallel to this dative in N. T. : Alford refers only to Gal vi. 1 1 Mt xii. 25 ; Lk xi. 17. fpr)[ji6a> besides in N. T. only Rev 3 : frequent in LXX. 18. ffpdaacv e'0 J upas Mt xii. 28 '; Lk xi. 2O. besides in N. T. only Paul 5 : LXX 29 : with eW only Paul l, LXX 6. C. Longer passages in which many words are identical. Here especially it should be borne in mind that in the earliest Christian days there was undoubtedly a habit and a power of accurate oral transmission, to which there is no parallel now. We therefore may not say of any closely similar passages that they cannot be thus accounted for. If however such passages as the following are examined together, as they may be, e. g. in Tischendorfs Synopsis Evangelic d) or, better still, in Rushbrooke's Synopticon^ it seems difficult to believe that they owe nothing to a written Greek source. As to the narratives especially, it 66 Indications of Sources pt. n appears very unlikely that they could have been handed on so exactly without the use of documents, even if this was the case with the discourses. Tisch Synop- (i) Narratives (including sayings). Syn. EV. ticon. Mk i. 16-20; Mt iv. 18-22: Calling of Peter, Andrew, James, and John . . . 31 4 Mk i. 21-8; Lk iv. 31-7: The Demoniac in the Synagogue at Capernaum . . . . 32 5 Mk i. 40-4 ; Mt viii. 2-4 ; Lk v. 12-14 : Cleansing of the Leper . . . . . . 35 8 Mtviii. 9, 10 ; Lk vii. 8, 9 : The Centurion's Faith 1 42 148 Mk vi. 41 ; Mt xiv. 19; Lk ix. 16: Feeding the 5,000 . .; 59 41 Mk viii. 1-9; Mt xv. 32-9 : Feeding the 4,000 . 66 49 f. Mk xiv. 32-4 ; Mt xxvi. 36-8 : Gethsemane . 153 108 Mk xiv. 48, 49 ; Mt xxvi. 55, 56 : ' Are ye come out,' &c. (cf. Lk xxii. 52, 53) . . . . 154 in Mk xv. 29-32 ; Mt xxvii. 39-44 : Jesus mocked on the Cross 165 121 (ii) Discourses. Mk ii. 9, 10 ; Mt ix. 5, 6 ; Lk v. 23, 24 : * Whether is easier,' &c. . . . . . . .36 10 Mk ii. 19, 20 ; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 34, 35 : ' Can the children of the bridechamber/ &c. . . -37 12 Mk xiii. 1923; Mtxxiv. 21-5: ' Shall be tribula- tion, such as,' &c. . . . . . -139 95 f. Mt xii. 27, 28 ; Lk xi. 19, 20 : 'By whom do your sons/ &c 47 *7 Mt xii. 41, 42; Lk xi. 31, 32: 'The men of Nineveh ' and ' the queen of the south ' 2 . . 91 158 Mt xxiv. 43-51 ; Lk xii. 39-46 : * If the master of the house had known/ &c. . . . . 95 168 The above are instances which have impressed the compiler of these lists, but there are other similarities as prolonged. 3 1 This is the only non-Marcan narrative. 2 But with change of order. 3 Some of them are named by Bacon, Introd. to N. T. } p. 179 note. i Identities in Language 67 From these * identities of language ', which seem all but unaccountable unless we admit some use of written Greek documents, we have now to turn to other phenomena, which point, at least as distinctly, to the influences of oral transmission. 1 SECTION II WORDS DIFFERENTLY APPLIED WE not infrequently find the same, or closely similar, words used with different applications or in different con- nexions, where the passages containing them are evidently parallel. How could these variations have arisen ? Copy- ing from documents does not seem to account for them ; 2 but it is not at all difficult to see how they might have arisen in the course of oral transmission. Particular words might linger in the memory, while their position in a sentence was forgotten ; and in some cases they might become confused with other words of similar sound. 3 1 On the combined use of these two kinds of sources see p. 217. 2 I do not forget the valuable caution against making a priori assertions ' as to what a serious writer will do, or will not do, in the way of dealing with the documents which he embodies in his work', which is supplied by the Rev.- C. Plummer's article in the Expositor, July, 1889 (3rd Series, vol. x. pp. 23 ff.), entitled 'A Mediaeval Illustration of the Documentary Theory of the Origin of the Synoptic Gospels'. But after carefully examining his illustrations of the freedom which mediaeval chroniclers allowed themselves in adapting, altering, and combining the MSS, which lay before them, I still hold that the numerous instances of l words differently applied' which I have collected in this Section (though Mr. Plummer does at the bottom of p. 28 give one interesting parallel to them), and the ' trans- positions ' which I have collected in the next Section, are, on the whole and when taken together, inexplicable on any exclusively documentary theory. See Moffatt's Historical N. TV, p. 616, notes; also E. D. Burton, Principles of Literary Criticism, tfc., pp. 20-2, referring to the literary methods (i) of N. T. writers as to quotations from O. T., (2) of the author of the Appendix to Mark, (3) of Tatian in his Diatessaron ; and Hobson, The Diat. of Tatian and the Synoptic Problem (Chicago, 1904), especially pp. 10 and 75 ff. 3 Some of the cases are such as might be ' clerical errors ', arising either in the first MSS. or more probably afterwards, if the scribes wrote from dictation. l The ear would not always be a certain guide to the sense. One F 2 68 Indications of Sources pt. ii Special attention will here be called to words of these kinds by the use of thick type. We may trace such variations : A. In the reports of the sayings of Jesus (though on the whole these are more accordant than any other parts of the Synoptic Gospels). B. In the attribution of the same, or very similar, words to different speakers. C. In the use of the same, or very similar, words as part of a speech and as part of the Evangelist's narrative. D. In the rest of the Synoptic narratives. The cases which seem to the present compiler most forcible will, as a rule, be placed first in the four lists ; but no stress is to be laid on this order. A. In the reports of the sayings of Jesus, i. Mk IV. 19 e eiairopcuo- ownriyouaiy rbv \6yov. (Mt xiii. 22 (Tvvnviyfi rbv Xdyoi/.) Lk viii. 14 OVTOL . . . owTnayorrai. 2, Mk xii. 2O OVK Mt xxii. 25 p) exa>v oWp/ta dTj- K.GV rfjv yvvaiKa avrov. Mt XXiv. 14 Kd\ Lk xxi. 13 ... anopr)- arerat vfj.lv eis (AapTU- Mk xiii. 9, 10 ... eis paprupiov avrois. Kal fls iravTa TO. fdvrj . . . ruplOK TTCKTIV rols eV rrj oxoTia, curare t r us Lk xii. 3 oo-a eV rrj o-KOTia fv ra> (a>ri il 6 eiy TO JeT 5 KYjpuar em TOJK These two sayings are assigned to different occasions by Mt and Lk, Mt giving them in a charge to * the twelve ', and Lk in an address to 'disciples', which starts from a warning against hypocrisy ; but the immediate contexts are the same in both Gospels. 6. Mt xii. 33 TI iroifjaaTe ro 8cv8pov KaXbv Kal rbv KapTrbv avTOV KaXoVj YI Troir]aaT ro 8ev8pov o~aTrpbv Kal TOV Kapnbv avTov aairpov. See also in Doublets. Lk vi. 43 ov yap (TTIV KaXbv TTOIOUC Kapirbv cranpov, ov8e nd\iv 8ev8pov crcnrpbv iroioui/ Kap- nbv KaXov. And so Troiei twice and Troieiv once in Mt vii. 17, 18. 7- Mt V. 45 OTTCOS yevrjoQe viol Mt V. 46 riva Lk vi. 35 Kal eorai 6 juaOos vn&v iro\vs ) Kal efffffde viol KT\. Lk Vi. 32 TTOl'a Vp.'lV X^P 1 * fOTlVj See also Transposition, p. 78. 8. Lk XI. 40, 41 a(f>povfs } ovx o iroir)- a-as TO eu>def Kal TO eacadec fnoir)o- ; 7T\rjv TCI IVQVTO. Sore (\(r)(j.oo~vi>r)v ) Kal I8ov ndvTa Ka- vCtpCt VU.il' f(TTlV 9 is only used twice besides by the Synoptists (viz. Mt v. 8 ; xxvii. 59). Mtxxiii. 26 Qapio-ale Tv(f)\f, Ka6d- ptaoc irp&Tov TO ecTOS rou vror^- piov ^Kal TTJS 7rapo^fi8os!\, Iva. yevr)Tai Kal TO CKTOS OVTOV K.O.- 0ap6f. Indications of Sources 9- pt. ii Mt X. 25 ... apKerbv TO) Iva ycwfrttt w? 6 SiSdcricaXos aurou. Lk vi. 40 ... KaTripTta-ficvos Se 10. Mk xiv. 8 o eiroiTjaey' ?rpo- e'Xa/3ej> pvpicrai . . . els rbv tv- Mt xxvi. 1 2 /SaXoCo-a ... TO iii! . . . Trpo? TO evTcHpidaui fte eTTOiT]- II. Mk xi. 3 *ai u0us auToy diro- ) Mt, xxi. 3 eudus Se dirooreXet In Mk these words are apparently meant to be said by the disciples to the owner of the colt as a promise that it should be returned : in Mt they are a prediction of the promptness with which the request would be granted. See also p. 1 20. Mt xi. 27 . . . ovfie TOV jrorcpd TIS Lk X. 22 ot/Sfis- yii'oxr/cfi TlS o vtoj- . . . TlS ca-Tiv 6 narfjp Mk iii. 28 irapra dfa- QiprfTat TOIS utois roil' tu'0pojT7(uk ra a jj.aTa KOI at JLiat KT\. '3 (?) Mt xii. 31, 32 Trao-a djuapria Kai ft\acr(f)r]p.ia Trot? . . . *ai 69 fav fiTTJ/ Xoyoi/ Kara TOU UlOU TOU cU'GpOJTTOU, Lk Xii. IO KOi 7TOS OS epei \6yov ts 7OV viov TOU dfdpUTCOU, acTat avra). The plural ' sons of men ' is noticeable as being used in N. T. only here and in Eph iii. 5 ; but often in LXX, e.g. Gen xi. 5 ; Ps iv. 3 ; Ivii. (Iviii.) 2. (It occurs in the first Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, No. III.) See Dr. Abbott in Enc. Brit., x. 792; Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl, ii. 1848 (T i&wjiei' is said by the man who brings the vinegar : in Mt xxvii. 49 aes tSwjxey is said by 01 XOITTOI. (See J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T., i. 175.) 2. In Mk x. 3 Jesus asks the Pharisees TI (= 'what') ufuy ^crei- Xaro Mwuafjs : in Mt xix. 7 they ask Him TI (= ' why') ovv Mwuaijs ^Tl\aTO KT\. 3- In Mt xxi. 41 diroXeaei (TOVS yecopyovs) *rX. is a reply from the hearers of the parable: in Mk xii. 9 ; Lk xx. 16 it is the answer given by Jesus to His own question. 4- In Mt xix. 20 the young ruler asks TI en uorepw : in Mk x. 21 Jesus says to him ef o-e uorepet (and so Lk xviii. 22 i> TO cuayycXiok TTJS j3aaiXeias. 2. In Lk viii. 46 Jesus says e-yo> v : in Mk v. 30 the Evangelist says of Him emyyous Iv eaur&> avrov 3- In Mt XXvi. I, 2 Jesus says oi'Sare on (juerd 8uo i^jJiepas TO : in Mk xiv. i ; Lk xxii. i the Evangelists speak of the feast as approaching (Mk jxeTa 8uo 4- In Mt xviii. i the disciples come and ask Jesus n's '/>a jAei^wy : in Mk ix. 34 ; Lk ix. 46 the Evangelists state that they had been, or were, disputing among themselves as to rt's ^ei^wi/. 5- In Mt xix. 24 Jesus says iraXw 8e Xeyw ufuy : in Mk x. 24 the Evangelist writes o 8e 'lya-ovs irdXic dfroKpidf}? Xeyei aurois. 6. In Mk xiv. 49 it seems that Jesus says aXX' IVa TrXY]pw0wcrn' at YPat : in Mt xxvi. 56 the Evangelist adds TOVTO de o\ov yeyovev tva. n' at ypai>. Other such cases may be seen by comparing Mk i. 37 with Lk iv. 42; Mt x. 7 with Lk ix. 2; Mk iii. 30 with Lk xi. 18; Mk xiv. 23 with Mt xxvi. 27; Mk ix. 9, Mt xvii. 9 with Lk ix. 36 (i. e. the command to the Apostles to be silent with the fact of their silence about the Transfiguration). n Words differently applied 73 D. Variations in the rest of the Synoptic narratives. i. aVTOV . , . Mt iii. 5 f irdaa r\ irepi^upos TOU 'lopSdcou. Lk iii. 3 KOI ^\6ev ds irdcray irepi- TOU 2. Mk vi. 19, 20 '] auTOi/ diroKTeli/ai, /cat OVK rjSv- va.ro' 6 yap 'HpaS^s <{>o|3eiTO TOV Icodvrjv. Mk xvi. 7 ; Mt xxviii. 7 irpodyct as (is TTjy raXiXaia^. Mt xiv. 5 ['Hpw dlTOICTeiKai <|>O^T]6T] T. Lk XXIV. 6 fJ.vfja6r)T as eAci en &^ eV TT] FaXiXaia. Mk xvi. 7 Aca0a>s elirct' ujxTy. | Mt xxviii. 7 I8ov elirov uplv. WH suggest that flnov is perhaps a primitive error for cinfv. Mk vi. 48 Z5o)j/ avrovs jxeVous cV TO) eXauvfiv, rjv yap 6 avrois. Mt xiv. 24 ro dc TrXotoj/ . . . J3aaa- VTTO rail' KVfjLaTcov, yap evavrios 6 avp.os. 6. Mk x. 17, 18; Lk xviii. 18, 19 StSaoncaXe dyaOe, TI noirjcra) (Lk . rifjLf Xeyeiy dyaSoK ; Mt xix. 1 6, 17 8iddarKa\f, Ti dya- QoV TTOi^tTO) . . . Tl /Xf epCDTClf TTfpt row dyaOou ; Mk xiv. 7 I OUK oiSa TO// Mt xxvi. 74 o^/c of Lk xxii. 60 OVK olda o Xeyeis. Xeycre. The vocative uvOpwrc occurs in Lk 4, Paul 3, Jam 1, and not elsewhere in N. T. (pp. 16, 36). 8. Mk xi. IO u f) epxofJifVTi /3a(7tXi'a TOV irarpbs f)p.&v Aauet'8. Lk has no mention of Aavet'S. Mt xxi. 9 axrawa TW vtai AaueiS. 74 Indications of Sources pt. ii Mk XV. 1 7 ircpmOlaaif auroJ TrXe- avT(s aKa.v6t.vov artyavov. Mt XXvii. 28 KOKKLVTJV Trepie0T]Kay airy, KUI vX*$aiTCf (TTva . . . epxop.efoi' drr' dypou. Mk iii. 8 aKOuokies ocra Trotel i TTpov avroj'. Mt XXvii. 32 e' ivpov Mk V. 3 T ^ II. Lk vi. 17 TJXOay aKOuorai UVTOV Kal Ia6f)vai KT\. 12. Lk viii. 27 eV oiKt'a OL-K dXX eV Toty fjLvf)p.a(riv. Mk V. 4 ovSei crat. Mt viii. 28 a) Mk i. 23 feat dveKpaev. Mk i. 26 (pavrjffav <|>a)CT] Lk iv. 33 Kai uvcKpa(v un'r) [Lk mentions no cry after the command Mk vi. 1 6 oi/ eyo> a7rK((pa\io'a Icd OUTOS fjedij. Mt xiv. 2 OUTOS f( 'latdvrjs 6 j3a7TTia'TT l s' avros TjyepQr) KT\. Lk ix. 9 ' OUTOS 16. Mk vi. 2O 'Hp&i&js- . . . d auToC TroXXa Tjiropeu Lk ix. 7 'HpaJSq? . . . finrjiropei fiia TO \cyfa6ai VTTO TivSav KT\. [Lk does not give the part ot the narrative in which Mk uses Mk XV. 37 dis (puvrjv p.eya\T)V Mt XXvii. 50 Kpdgas Cpavfj peyd\T) eenvcvafv. II Words differently applied 75 18. Mk V. 24 KOI TJKoXouOei avrov. Mt ix. 19 KCU eyfpde\s 6 'irjcrovs TjicoXoudei auT<3, KOI ol avrov. 19- Mt iv. 13 eX6o>> K.a.Ta>KTjaev (is Lk iv. 31 vaovfj.. 2O. els Kaap- Mt xi. 1 2 17 jSatrtXeia raw ov at Staorai Lk xvi. 1 6 T] jSao-tXeia roO 6eoC fuayyeXierai, icai vra? fls avrfjv |3 id^erat. Lk's is the general classical use of the verb (see instances in Thayer, and Lid. and Sc.). 21. Mk i. 45 6 Se ee\6a>v fjpgciTO . . roi' Xoyoi'. Lk V. 15 Xoyos TTfp\ O.VTOV. e fia\\ov 6 There must also have been similarity in sound between and -r Mk ix. 6 ov yap fiftd TI fj' eK(j)o|3oi yap eyevovro. 22. Mt Xvii. 6 KCU OKOU- Lk ix. 34 8e ev T&) TOVS fis r av- Thus the 'fear' is placed at three different points in the narrative by the three writers. 23- Mk V. 31 Lk viii. 45 ot 0^X01 auve \ovcriv ae Ka\ dnoQ\i$ouV jieXoov aov Ka\ fifj o\ov TO crco/xa aov P\T)Qf] (Is y((vvav' Kai d fj Se^ia o-ov ^elp aKav8a\i(t a(, %K.KO\lfov avTTjv Kai (3a\( djro o-ov, avu.<$(pei yap aoi iva dnoXrjTat (V Tv aov Kai p.f} o\ov TO aa>ua aov (Is y((vvav dn(\6r}. MtB. Mt xviii. 8, 9 el 8e rj 6 TTOVS aov KO\!/OV avrov Kai Ka\6v aoi a>r)v KV\\OV fj \o)\6v ) q dvo \dpas tj dvo irodas (\ovTa pXrjSrjvat (Is TO nvp TO alwviov. aov O~(, K- diro aou* fls TTJV Kai ci o(p6a\uos aov eeXe avrov Kai Ka\6v o~oi to~Tiv TTJV farjv ft uovs (\ovTa vav TOV irvpos. ae, diro aou' (Is dvo 6t P vov > dnoKO-^fov avTTjv' Ka\6v ((JTtv o~e KV\\OV do-(\6e'iv (Is Tf)V fafjv TI Tas 8vo ftdpas e^oj/ra dnfXde'iv (Is TTJV y((i>vav } fls TO TTVQ TO ao-/3fcrTov. Kai (av 6 TTOVS o~ov o*Kav8a\iT] o~t ) dnoKO\l/ov avTOV Ka\6v (O~TIV at flo~(\6\bv f) TOVS dvo irodas e^owa (Is Trjv yeevvav. Ka\ (av 6 6( p.6s arov o~Ka avTov' KaXov at (o-Ttv p.ovo(f>8a\- pov do-(\d(iv (Is TTJV (3ao-i\(iav TOV 6(ov T) 8vo i (Is ye(vvav. IV Doublets Mt B, which is parallel in position to Mk, 1 is much more similar to it than is Mt A (which may probably be Logian). In A there are hardly twenty words or parts of words, in B there are more than fifty, which agree with the language of Mk, an excess which is only partially caused by the greater length of the passage : observe also specially the addition of de&os, 6vta in A only, and its inver- sion of the order of the eye and hand, besides its omission of the foot. It will be seen that a few words are printed in thick type as peculiar to A and B, but, though worth notice, they are not very important, or distinctive, especially as in the case of the eye . . . KOI /3ti)v rrjv yvvalita avrov napcKTos Aoyov iropvctas rroiet avTrjv fjLot\vd^vai^ } KOI 6s cav Lk xvi. 1 8 nas 6 dirdXvav rrjv yvvaiKa avrov KOI yapav ercpav poixcvei, Kai 6 aTroAfAv/i/i/qi/ aVo dvdpos yap.S)v MtB. Mt xix. 9 XC'YW 8e vplv on 6? av rr)v yvvaiKa avrov fj.fj tropveia, /cat ya^arj a\\r)v Mk X. 1 1 , 1 2 os av airo\var) TTJV yvvaiKa avrov Ka\ ya^a-rj a\\r]v eV avTrjv, Ka\ eav avrf] rov avdpa avTrjs a\\ov In the form of the sentence Mt A corresponds with Lk and Mt B with Mk, as appears in iras 6 dno\vo>v and in the whole of the second clause. Probably therefore the latter have their source in 1 In these comments the abbreviations Mt, Mk, Lk are often used for ' the above passage from Mt', &c. 2 It is to be observed that the preceding verse is parallel to the apparently Logian Mt v. 18 which stands at the commencement of the contrast between old and new, of which the subject of adultery forms one. G a Indications of Sources Pi. ii the Marcan, and the former in the Logian document, though they are differently placed in Mt and Lk, as we shall see to be the case more often than not with presumably Logian sayings (pp. 108 ff.). Yet Lk resembles B and Mk in the mention of marrying another (Lk (Tepav as so often, B and Mk oXX^). And the whole difficult matter is further complicated by differences of reading: see especially WH mg of B, and observe that the words in A which are bracketed by WH form a strongly attested Western omission (om. D, a b k, codd. Gr. et Lat. ap. Aug.). On Mk see Swete, and Menzies, The Earliest Gospel, in loc., and Jiilicher, Intr. to N. T 7 ., E. T., p. 323. Observe the very important exception as to iropvela among the purely Matthaean points. Wright in Synopsis 2 , p. 99, and Allen in loc., are among many writers who regard it as an editorial or later interpolation in both places. No. 3. Mt A. Mt Vii. 1 6 I 8 OTTO TCOP avT&v 7riyva> vvxa ; OLTO> irav ftfvo'pov dyadbv Kapnovs KU\OVS frotet, TO 8f arairpbv dfvBpov Kapnovs irovrjpovs irotfl' ov dvva- Lk vi. 43-5 v y a p fcrnv &ei> Tat devdpov dyaBbv Kapirovs TTOVIJ- Ka\bv TTOIOVV Kapirbv vairpov, ov8e povs cvcyKelv, ovSe devdpov aatrpov ira\iv o'evo'pov vfjtiv } dvtKTO- Tfpov corai yt) 2o8o/ucoi> KOI TofAopp&iv cv r]fjLfpa Kpicrews f] TTJ TroXet fKtivrj. Mt B. Mt xi. 2\ ir\rjv Xeyco vp.lv on yrj 2o8o/xcui> dveKTOTCpov ecrTai e'f Lk X. 12 Xe'yo) Vfjiiv on 2oo6fj.ois fv TJy jy^iepa fKcivr) dvtKTOTfpov carat fj TTJ TroXet Mt A and Lk are placed opposite, as those passages come from the charges to the Twelve and the Seventy which are so closely connected. Their origin is probably Logian, and the rare word suggests that B may come from the same source. 1 It is worth notice that the passage in Mt vii is not nearly so closely parallel to Lk in wording as that in Mt xii ; for there are but 15 words or parts of words identical in the former case, while there are 35 in the latter. Similarly, in No. 17 we shall find that Mt, apparently using twice the material which Lk uses only once, is verbally closer to him in the case in which he differs from him in locating the material than in that in which they agree in attributing it to the same occasion. 86 Indications of Sources pt. ii lo-is, one of the two peculiarities of A and B, is characteristic of Mt, both with f^epa and alone (pp. 5, 31). No. 5. Mt A. Mt X. 22 a Kai tvea&e fju(rovfj,fvoi vnb 7rdvTO)V 8m TO ovoud fj.ov. Mt B. Mt xxiv. 9 b KCU (o-(o-0f (JLlO-OVfJifVOl VTTO TTaVTWV Qvatv dta TO ovofjui Mk xiii. 1 3 a Ka fJilO-OVfJ-fVOl VTTO dia TO ovopd fj,ov. Lk xxii. 17 KOI 0-fv in Mt B. No. 6. MtA. IVIt X. 22 b 6 8e vnofj-eivas els reXos OVTOS mt&jirerat, MtB. Mt xxiv. 1 3 6 8e vnofjifivas els T\OS Mk xiii. 13^ 6 8e vrropeivas els All identical : so here, as in No. 5, no inferences can be drawn. No. 7. MtA. Mt X. 38 KOI off ov Aa/zj3ai/ei TOJ o~Tavpbv avTov Kai aKo\ov6fl orriVa p,ov, OVK eo-Tiv fj,ov agios. LkB. Lk xiv. 27 ooriff ov o~Tavpbv eavTov Kai p\Tat OTTIO-O) fjiov, ov ftvvaTai tlvai /zou ua6r]Tf)s. Lk A. Lk ix. 23 ei rtff 0e\(i MtB. Mt xvi. 246?' OTTIO-O) /MOV a napvr)o~do~6a> Kai aparco roi' o~Tavpbv Mk viii. 34 t'L TIS OTTlVfc) UOU , cavTov Ka\ dpdra) TOV o~Tavpov aVTOV KO.I dKO\OV0lT(i> dpvr)o~do-6a> dparo) TOV o~Tavpbv naff rjpepav, Ka\ fJ.01. IV Doublets 8 7 Mt A and Lk B, though differently placed, agree against the other three in giving a negative form to the precept, and in omit- ting the mention of self-denial. And they both follow immediately upon the non-Marcan sayings about natural affection in comparison with loyalty to Christ. So they may be Logian, and the other three Marcan in origin. Neither Mt A and B nor Lk A and B have any distinctive characteristics of their own, unless the substitution of epxeo-dat for f\6fiv in Lk B, as being more similar to cpxtrai in Lk A, may be taken as having any significance. Observe in Lk A the characteristically Lucan naff (pp. 19, 41). No. 8. Mt A. Mt X. 39 6 eupcbi; rrjv avrov oVoXeWi avryv, KUL 6 ano- XcVas rfjv tyvxfjv avrov evfo~ai os 6* av avroXeo-j; TTJV avrov evfKev , OVTOS o~Q)o~fi av- Lk rr]V (avrov o~)o~ai ctTroXccrfi 6s 8* av ciTroXeVei avrov KUJ] rov Xtou o-oxrci avrr]V. LkB. xvii. 33 6s tav avrov 7Tpnrotr]o-acr0ai dno- XeVei avrrjv, 6s 8* av diroXto-fi a>oyovT]o~i avrrjv. In this case, unlike the preceding one, there are no special similarities between Mt A and Lk B : indeed the latter differs remarkably from all the other versions of the saying, by containing the unusual verbs irtpmoi^aL and faoyovea, both which occur in N. T. elsewhere only once in Acts and once in i Tim. 1 1 But faoyovea: occurs in LXX 11 times (in 3 Ki xxi. (xx.) 31 with tywxas) ; and irepiiroicca (usually in middle voice) 33 times (in Ezek xiii. 18, 19, with 88 Indications of Sources Ft. n But between Mt B, Mk, and Lk A, there is sufficient similarity to support the suggestion of a Marcan origin ; for tfe'Xco and o-o>a> are used only in these three versions. The use of eupumo twice in Mt A and once in Mt B may be a sign of Matthaean editorship, though the verb is in more general use by Lk than by Mt. Observe the characteristic addition of * the Gospel ' in Mk : it is one of the few instances in which a later editorial insertion is probable, for it could hardly have been omitted both by Mt and Lk (cf. p. 152). Syr sin has 'for my Gospel's sake'. This is the most important saying found in all four Gospels l : see Jn xii. 25, where however aTroXXu/u is the only verb used in common with any of the Synoptists. No. 9. Mt A. Mt Xli. 39 yevea Trovrjpa Kat (rrjp.cov 0-tJfJ.eiOV OV OOUr)(TTtU TO crTjfj.e'iov 'lava TOV rrpo Ka 6 X (L dpOrjo-fTat air avrov. Mt. B. Mt XXV. 29 TO) yap C'XOVTI do6f}o-frai Kal TOV de fj.r) CXOVTOS Kal o %X fl dpdfj- an avrov. 6s- OVK e^ei, Kal 6 e TT avrov Lk A. Lk viii. 1 8 os av yap *XV> 8odf)(TTai avrai, Kal 6s av fj,f) e^J/, Kal 6 doKfl eftfiv dp0f)(TTai aV avrov. LkB. Lk xix. 26 Xe'-yco vfiiv on Trayrl ra> 8o6r) yap Xe'yw KOKKOV O~IVU- Trecos, cpt Ire TU opei TOVTO) Mera/3u vdev avvaTr)o~i Vfuv. 9 Indications of Sources pt. ii Mt xxi. 21 MtB. djxTjj' Xe'yw fyui>, eav Kal p.ff StaKpiQiJTC, ov fJLOVOV TO TT)S (TVKTJS 7TOir]O'T ) dXXa Kav rw opet TOUTO) elV^re "Apdrjrt Kal &\r)6r)Ti els rfjv 0dAao-, yevrjo-erai. Lk xvii. 6 ft e^ere TT'HTTIV a>s KOKKOV o~ wane us, eXeyere av rfj o~VKafjuvToi eV^arot. Lk Xlii. 30 Kal Idov el&lv eToi OL eo~ovTat eV^nrot. Here again Mt A and Mk, which are parallel in position, agree exactly, and probably come from the Marcan document. Mk X. 3 1 TroXXoi Se f(rovrai eo~%aToi Kal fotj eitr^aroi TTparrot. IV Doublets 9 1 Mt B might either be repeated by the editor after the Parable of the Labourers in the Vineyard, which illustrates this saying, or might be brought in with the parable from the Logian source. The latter is rendered the more probable alternative by the fact that the clauses are here transposed from the order in Mt A and Mk, and agree with that in Lk. A and B have nothing distinctive of Mt. No. 13. Mt A. Mt XX. 26, 2*7 OV% OUTOOff CO~T\V V Vjjuv* aXX* off av 6e\r) eV vjjuv /xe'yns yevecrOai ecrrat vp&v dui- KOVOS, Kal os av 6e\r) cv vjjuv eivai npuTos co-rat v[jiS>v SovXos. MtB. Mt xxiii. ii 6 MkB. Mk X. 43, 44 ov^ ourcoff df (TTLV eV Ufuv' aXX* off av 6f\rj fjieyas yevecrQai fv vfjiiv, corat vpS)V StaKovos, Kcti os av 6e\r) fv vp.lv tlvai Trpcoroff, corai it&vrwv dov\os. MkA. Mk ix. 35 f i Ttj 6e\i Trpwros eivai eVrai irdvTW eo~^aroy KU\ irdvrdtv diaKovos. Lk xxii. 26 vjjifls 5e oi>x oin-coff, aXX* 6 fififav fv vfuv ytvfo-0Q) ws 6 vfa>Tpos. Kal o rjyovfjicvos a)ff 6 8taKovS)v. Here again the identity of language in Mt A and Mk B is almost complete, and points decidedly to a common source, which would be generally held to be a Marcan one. In this one case a doublet in Mk is entered, irpSrros and 8ido-(T<*)v fls ras o~vva- pvo~o~(i>v (Is ray o'fi'a- ddo~Ka>v ev rats o~vva- ywyas avT&v els oXrjv ytoyay rrjv 'lovo'aias. yooyats avrcov KOI KTJ- rr\v TaXtXatai/ Kal ra (So WH with NBCL pvo~o~a>v TO euayyeXioy Sui/i^ta eKp&\o>v. QR, i, &c. [and so TTJS jSaaiXetas KCU 0e- Syr ein J ; but Tisch pcnreuwy ircio'ciy VOGOV and Revisers TaXi- KCIL TTttO'Cll' IJ-ClXftKLClk Xatay.) ei> Tyu,ay ras TToXeis ndaas Kal ray Ko>/iay, KVK\a> O~tddo~K(i)V. 8t.8do-K Koi Krjpvarcrav TO TTJS jSaaiXeias Kal Kal irdaak jxaXa Ki'ay. (And the words TTfvftv naorav voo*. KOI iracrav occur again in x. i.) These very similar summaries of the ministrations of Jesus occur in Mt immediately before the first two of the great collections of His sayings, viz. those in Mt v-vii and x. The agreement of irfptfyevboth in Mt A and Mt B, and of ras K^as also in B, with Mk vi. 6 gives some slight probability to the sug- gestion that B gives the passage in its original situation, and that in the course of oral teaching its phraseology may have been made use of to describe the other similar circumstances to which A refers. Dr. Salmon has made a different suggestion, viz. that Mt in A ' broke off the use of one document to turn to another; and that the verse is repeated when he turns back to the former document ', i.e. in B (Introd. to N. T. g , p. 580). No. 1 6. MtA. 1 Mt ix. 27-31 KOI Trapdyoi/rt - 6fv ro> 'iqtroC r)KO\ovdr)(rav 8uo TV0A(Xoi, Kal Xeyft avrois 6 *Ir)crovs IltcrreveTf ort dvvap.at TOVTO noirjcrai \fyovcriv avrto Nat, Kvpie. rore TJ\|/aTO raik o(p6a\p.S)v avrSiV \eywv Kara KOI r)Vfa>%8r)crav avrtov ol Kai i>fftpip,r)0r) av- rois 6 'lr)(Tovs \eywv 'Opare p.rj- 8fls yivtoffKeTto' ol 8f ef\dovTfs o"i((pr)p.i(rav avrbv tv 0X17 rfj yy 1 The difficulties connected with the records of this and the following miracle, as given in Mt ix. 27-34, are ver y serious. I have attempted to deal with them in Exp. Times, xiii. 24 f., and more briefly on p. 167 below. 94 Indications of Sources pt. ii MtB. Mt XX. 29-34 K0l (K- 77opeuo/zei>v OTTO avroi o^Xoy 770X11?. i8oi 8uo TixXol K irapa T 6Yi irapdyet, Kpaav Xe- yovTfs Kupte, e\cr]crov , iu6? Aavfid. 6 Xeyoi/Tt? Kupte, Aavei'8. oraff [oj ' O.VTOVS KOI tlnev Tt 6e\cT o-o) /xti/ ; eyovo-iV av- ra> Kuptf, iva ai/otyeo- o-tv oi 6(f)6a\fj.o\ ypuv. 8c 6 T)\}/aTO TWK O/LI- f \lfav KOI Mk X. 46-52 KCU ep- Kai TOV OTTO av- (Cat UVTOV Kal fxai/oi) 6 tu6s BapTi/uatos TU- irapa. rrjv 6Sdc. feat on *I?;a-ov? 6 Naaprjvos ecrrtv rjp^aro Kpdeiv Kal Xeyeii' Yte AaveiS ' /jif. KCU n-oXXoi tw 6 de TToXXaJ Yte Aauet'8, /xe. Kat oras avrdv. /cat ra> 6 6*7761^ Tt 0~0t 6 8e avrw rv(f)\bs PafijSovvei, ivo. dva- jSXeio). KOI 6 ' airw nayf, j iri(TTis ffov aecrtoKfv (re. Kal cvBvs di/e/3Xe\|/'v, Kat r)KO\ou0i aurw eV The resemblances between Mt A and Mt B are such as to suggest strongly that the same miracle may be twice recorded by Mt. Lk xviii. 35-43 y/- 8f TO) avrov fls t lpet^oi TV- (pXdy TIS (KaOrjTo napa Tr)v68bv7raiTu)V. UKOV- (ras df o^Xov 8ta7ro- Tt tir) TOVTO' anrjy- yeikav de auTo> OTt 6 Nafcopalo? Kal tftoT]- (Tfv Xeyoai' Ir)(rov vie Aavet'S, cXeqcrov /xf. Kai oi irpodyovTfs eVe- TtfjLav ai>T(S tva myijfff avrbs 8e TroXXo) pa\\ov Yte Aauei'8 irpbs avrov. fyyiaavros avrov fTrrjpwTTjO'ev av- TOV Tl 0-01 6f\lS 7701170*00 ; 6 8f flnev Kuptf, iva dva/SXc'^o). Kat 6 'l?;o-oOff 17761* aii- rw 'Ai'd/SXe^oi'* 17 77tV- Tts ffov (T(f)6s. KOI edavpaa-av ol o^Xoi Xe'yoirer OvfieVore c(f)dvr) OVTODS eV r&> *Ia- par)\. fof fie ^apitratoi eXeyov *Ev TO) ap^oi/Tt ru>v daifjiovitov CK- MtB. Mt xii. 22-4 Tore irpoa^ey- K.O.V aurco 8aifjLOVi^6fjLfvov rv Kai KG)0oV Ka\ f6epa.Tr(\)o~fv av- TOV, u). Kat /^urrarro iravres ol Lk XI. 14, 15 Kai rfv e'K/3aXXa)i> daifj.6viov Ko>(f)6v' eyfvero 8e rov daifjioviov ef\66vros eXdXrjaev 6 KQ)(f)6s. Kai ftiavfiaaav ol 0^X01* ff dc e OLVTWV ftTrav *Ev Bee^e- ra> v and -acv should also be noticed ; but they have not been printed in thick type because at the beginning of the narrative the verb is used by A of the blind men and by B of the multitude : at the end all the Synoptists use it of the blind man or men. 2 The bracketed words are a ' Western omission ' (WH, Introd,, p. 176). S vr sin a j so om j ts them. Indications of Sources pt. ii o^Xot Koi eXeyoi> MTJTI OVTOS evriv 6 vlos Anvet'S ; ot 8e 3?apio~aioi (iKova-avTes clirov OVTOS OVK CK- fld\\fi TO. 8a.ip.6vta fl p.r) ev ro> Beff/3otV ypa/ifiareW fcai &apio~aia)v \cyovTfs Ai&aapi(raiot KCU SaSSovKalot OVTS 7ri]po)Ti]O'nv avrov e< TOV ovpavov eTTidel^ai avTos. 6 8e diroKpiOcls etirei/ aurots Lk XI. 1 6 Tpot de ireipdovTS arrjfjif'iov e^ ovpavov fftrovv trap* avTOV . . . V. 29 TCOV 8e o^Xcai' Mk viii. n, 12 KOI egfi\dov 01 <&apLO-aloi Ka\ fjp^avro crvv&]Teiv aurcS, r)TovvT(S Trap avrov (rrj- pflov OTTO TOV ovpavov, 7Tfipdov- res avrov. KOI dvao~Tcvdas ru Trvevp-aTi avTOv Xc'-yet rX. For the words of Jesus which follow in each case, see above, No. 9, on p. 88. Judging from the position and contexts of the two pairs of records, it would be natural to class Mt A and Lk as Logian, Mt B and Mk as Marcan in origin. Probably we are right in doing so, notwithstanding the fact that as to two expressions, TrcipdfrvTfs and -e^ ofy>aww,Lk agrees with Mt B and Mk in having them, while 1 Compare the note on doublet No. 3, p. 85. IV Doublets 97 Mt A is without them. Also fftrow nap' avrov in Lk only is similar to &TOVVTCS nap avrov in Mk only. But all these three expressions are so common, and so much in place here that, as in the case of No. 9, no importance can be attached to the insertion of them. And, as in No. 9 again, the words marked in thick type as peculiar to Mt A and B are also unimportant. The two following doublets differ from the preceding ones, in that they bring out identities between Matthew's records of the Baptist's ministry and that of Jesus. No. 19. Mt A. Mt iii. 2 ... Kr)pv(To~Q)V ev TTJ TTJS 'lovSaia? Xfywi/ Mera- fjyyiKfv y&p 57 /3a(7(Xeia Tb>f oupaco>v. MtB. Mt iv. 1 7 . . . rjparo 6 'Irjo-ovs Kr)pvo-o-(iv Kai Xe'yftv Mfrai/ofirc, rjyytKfv yAp 17 /3ao-iXet'a Tail' Mk i. 4, Lk iii. 3 ... Krjpv Mk i. 14, 15 ... ^X#ei/ 6 'ITJO-OVS (is rfjv TaXiXaiav Kr)pvo~(ra>v TO fvayye\iov TOV feov [(cat Xeywi/] on IleTrX^ptorat 6 Kaipbs Kai rjyyiKev rj jSatriXeia TOV 6fov' /uerai/oetTf Kat TrtaTfixTf ev TW Mt seems in A to be expanding, in B to be summarizing, the corresponding passages of Mk, but in both he attributes identically the same proclamation to the Baptist and to Jesus respectively. Thus it appears that it is only Mt who attributes to the Baptist the mention of the ' kingdom of heaven ' (or * of God '). Mk first names it in i. 15, as above, but Lk not until iv. 43. See also Mt x. 7 ; Lk x. 9, n. No. 20. Mt A. Mt iii. IO nav ovv dfvdpov /LIT) 7TOLOVV KapnOV KO\OV CKKOTTTfTai Kai els niip /SaAAerai. HAWKINS H Lk iii. 9 irdv ovv devdpov noiovv Kapirbv [fcaXofJ / Kai els niip /Sa'XXerat. 98 Indications of Sources Pt. n MtB. Mt vii. 19 nav 8ei>8(jov fj,i] TTOLOVV KapTTOIS KO\OV eKKOTTTfTCU Kill (IS nvp /SuXXerat. 1 Except the omission of the conjunction ovv in Mt B, which is closely connected with a passage discussed as No. 3 above (p. 84), there is no difference in these three sayings. Compare also Mt's use of yevvfoaTa ^x^v&v in xii. 34 and xxiii. 33, as well as in iii. 7 == Lk iii. 7. The two remaining doublets in Matthew are not so interesting to students of the Synoptic Problem as the preceding twenty, because there are no parallels in Mark or Luke with which they can be compared. No. 21. Mt A. Mt ix. 13 TTOpfvOevres de /ua&re TI iarnv *E\eos 0eXa> Ka! ou Oucrtac' ov yap r]\6ov KaXeaeu KT\. MtB. Mt xii. 7 ( i & eyvaKfiTe TI earif "E\eos 0\a> Kal ou Qvaiav, OVK av KaTeStKaaarc TOVS dvairiovs. Both these are Matthaean additions to narratives which are placed consecutively in Mk and Lk, and which are apparently Marcan in origin. On the quotations from O. T. in Mt, see pp. 154 ff. No. 22. Mt A. Mt xvi. 19 Kal o la.v r\crr\s eir! TTJS y^S corcu SeSejxekoz/ iv rot? oupa- vols, Kal 6 eaf Xuarjs CTTI TTJS yr\s earat XeXujuiei'oi' iv TOLS oupai^ols. Mt B. Mt xviii. 1 8 dfj.r}v Xeya> vp.lv, ocra lav SYjaTjTe irl TTJS yTJs laTai SeSejxej'a iv oupai'co Kal oaa lav XuorTjre em TTJS Vps I<7Tat XeXujJieVa iv This promise given to Peter in A, is repeated in B to all whom Jesus is addressing, apparently ' the disciples ' who came to Him 1 The saying seems to break the connexion here, whereas it agrees well with its context in the Baptist's teaching. iv Doublets 99 in xviii. i. It occurs each time in close connexion with one or other of the only passages in the Gospels in which the word fKKXrjaia is found. The resemblances between Mt v. 34 and xxiii. 22 ; x. 1 7 and xxiv. 9 a ; x. 40 and xviii. 5 ; xi. 27 a and xxviii. 1 8 ; xxiv. 23 and 26; xxviii. 7 and lo, 1 though worth notice, have not been regarded as sufficient to constitute doublets. For shorter repetitions m Matthew, see pp. 168, 170. Doublet in Mark. Mk ix. 35 with x. 43, 44 2 : for this see Matthew No. 13, on p. 91 above. There is no other instance to be entered here, as it has been decided to treat ' He that hath ears, Sec/, separately from the doublets : see p. 106 below. And the resemblances between Mk ix. 23 and xi. 23, and between xiii. 5, 6 and 21-3 do not come up to the standard of closeness adopted in these lists. 3 Doublets in Luke. No. i. LkA. Lk viii. 1 6 ouSels Se Ka\V1TTl aVTOV (TKCVft f) K\ivr]S Tidrjcnv, aXX eVt \v\vias TiBr](nv, Iva. ot eunropeuojjiefoi fiil/as Mk iv. 21 fj.r)Tt fp^erai 6 Iva VTTO TOV podtov TfOfj ij virb K\ivr)v, ov% Iva eVt TTJV LkB. Lk xi. 33 ouoVis \i>x v ov aij/as cis Kpvnrrjv Ti6r](nv ov8e i^ro TOV fjLodiov oXX* eVi TTJV Xv^viav, Iva, ol etenropeuofAei'Oi TO <|>(us P\e- TrwatK. 1 Treated by Prof. Lake as a doublet, Resurrection of J. C., p. 86. 2 On the complications of Mk ix. 33-42 see Enc. Bibl., ii. 1864-6. 3 The three predictions of the Passion, &c. (Mk viii. 31, ix. 31, x. 33, and parallels; Tisch, Syn. Evang.^ 70, 73, 116), are omitted from notice, because they are so expressly assigned to three distinct occasions. H 2 100 Indications of Sources Pt. ii Mt V. 15 ov8f Kaiovviv \v\vov KOI Ti6eao~iv avrbv virb TOV /io8ioi> ttXX* fTTt TT)V \V\viaV, KOI \dfl1Tfl Tracriv rois ei> rfj oiKia. Here, as the thick type shows, the strongest similarities are the editorial ones between A and B. To the last clause in them Mt has a parallel in substance, but it is so adapted as to lead on to his next sentence ovras Xa/u\|/-aVa> KT\. As to the source of the original form of the saying, no decided conclusion can be drawn. 1 For though Lk A and Mk are found in the same place and connexion, they do not coincide more exactly than the other passages do, their agreement as to K\ii>rj being balanced by the agreement of Lk B with Mk and Mt as to podios. But the consideration of No. 2 will lend some probability to a Marcan origin for at least Lk A here, as the passages are con- secutive both in Lk A and in Mk. No. 2. Lk A. Lk Vlii. iy ou yap ecrrw KpvnTov o ov (pavfpbv yevrjo-fTai, ov8e drroKpv(pov o ov /j,f} yvo)o-6rj KO\ cis (pavepov f\6rj. LkB. Lk xii. 2 ovftev 8e o~vyKfKa\vfJ.- ptvov fo-rlv o OVK aTroKa\v(p6rj- crfrai, Ka\ Kpvnrbv o ov Mk iv. 22 ov yap (o~riv KpirnTov eav diroKpvfpov dXV Iva Mt X. 26 oudei> yap e'orii> p.fVOV O OVK U7TOKa\V(pdf)0-fTat, KOI KpvnTOV o ov yvanrdr)O~eTai. Here the wording is so very similar in Lk A and Mk, and in Lk B and Mt respectively, and the difference in wording between the two pairs is so wide, that we seem to have two versions of the saying, the former handed down through the Marcan, the latter through the Logian document. 1 See Bacon, Sermon on the Mount, p. 132, on the connexions in which the saying is found. IV Doublets - ioi Here as so often (see pp. 122, 131) Mk has the most harsh and difficult form of the saying, for his purposive JW is in Lk A replaced by a future, the tense which we find in Lk B and Mt. There is nothing to be marked as limited to Lk A and B, as yivwvKU) is also used in Mt. The variation of this saying in No. IV of the New Sayings of Jesus from Oxyrhynchus (1904) should be compared. No. 3. Lk viii. 1 8 with xix. 26. For this see Mt No. 10, on p. 89 above. LkA. Lk iX. 3 . . . fJLT)T TTT)- pav . . . V. 4 Kal fls TJV av oiKiav Kal fKfWfv f^f V. 5 al oaoi av urj 8f- p.fVOl OTTO Tr)S fKfivr]s TOV KoviopTov drro TO>V 7ro8oi> aTTOTtmo-o-ere els rvptov eu O.VTOVS No, 4. Mt X. 10 . . . ft^ 7TJ- pav . . . VV. II, 12 etp TJV 8' ap TTO\IV ea>s av e V. 1 4 Kal os av pfj Tai VfJids fJLTj8 aKOlHTT) TOVS \6yovs VfJ.a>v, eep- %6fjLevoi e^co TTJS olicias ^ TTjf TToXfWS eKClVTJS KTlV(igaT TOV KOVlOp- TOV T Mk vi. 8 . . . p) TTJ/- pav . . . V. IO OTTOU fav flfff\ av f V. 1 1 Kal os av TOTTOS vp.as fJ.r)de vu)V, fKiro- pfVOp.fVOl fKfWfV fKTl- vdgaTf TOV XQVV TOV T(i)V ITodStV fls uaprvptov av- LkB. Lk X. 4 . . . w irfjpav . . . V. 5 ^ LS *l v ^ ai> e io~e\dr)T oiKiav, V. 7 V avrrj 8f rfj oiKia (ffOovres Kal TrivovTfS Ta nap avratv, agios yap 6 epydrrjs TOV fjuffOov avrov. p. oiKias fls oiKiav. VV. IO, II fls TJV 6' av TTO\IV ftt 6r)Tf Kal /u// Se^uma vuas, ff\- 66vTfS fls TO? TrXareias 102 Indications of Sources pt. ii Kal TOV Kovioprbv KO\\r)6evTa rip.1v CK rr/s vfjiutv (Is TOVS TroSa? aTro/za VfUV' 7T\r)V TOVTO ytVW(TKT OTl fjyyiKfv fj (3 fy ei> TTJ j/ avrov TOV irciTpbs Kai To>v ayiwv eVa>- LkB. Lk xii. 9 6 8c apvr^ara^vos TI tov Tutv avdptoirav dira av dyye\(ov TOV 6eov. Mk Vlii. 38 off yap eav e7raii> dyiav. Mt X. 33 oaTis 8c dpvr)V dvdpa>ir. LkB. Lk Xxii. 24 eyeWo 8e KOI (ftiXovfiKin ev au- TOIS, TO TIS ttUTWl' No. 8. 1 Mt xviii. I 7Tpo(rri\6ov padr)Tal TIS (t V ev Tfj ovpavutv Xe- Mk ix. 34 irpos dXXi7- Xovp yap ev 717 6Sw TIS The ro before TIS is a Lucan characteristic, see pp. 22, 47. There is not much similarity in the sequels of the two Lucan verses ; compare, however, ix. 48 and xxii. 26. No. 9. Lk A. Lk xi. 43 ovai vplv Tols on dyanaTf TYJV TTpoa fv TOIS (rvvaytoyaig KOL TOVS otr- cv Tols dyopals. 1 This is the only Lucan doublet in narrative, the other ten being in discourse. io 4 Indications of Sources pt. ii LkB Lk xx. 46 UTTO Ttof ypauuaTeoiv T&V 6c\6vTG)v Trcpnra- Tfiv fv OToXaiff Kal *v rats dyopals /cat 7rp(0TOKa6f8pias fv rats (Tvvayotyais /cat Trpcoro- K\Iv ypaufj.aTU)v TO)*' 6(\OVT(jiV (V OTO- Xats ncptnaTflv KOI dTOKaQ(dpias tv Tals avvayatydls Ka\ irpcaTOKKicrias ev Toils paTels Kal ol v than to the dyandTe of Lk A. It appears then that Mt's use of the Marcan source here is affected and modified by the influence of that record (probably directly or indirectly Logian) in Lk xi, to which there are so many parallels in Mt xxiii. No. 10. LkA. Lk xii. II, 12 oTav 8e t vuds firi TO.S (rvvayayas Kal TOS dp%as KOI ras e^oucrtay, UTJ pfpi- TI tlirr]Tt' TO yap ayiov TTJ &pa a del LkB. Lk XXi. 14, 15 6fTc ovv Kap8iais t/ucot/ , iya> yap Mk xiii. 1 1 Kat OTav ayaxTiv vp.ds S, fJ.rj irpop.epifj.vaTe TI } dXX* e tav dodfj vulv 1 The bracketed words are omitted by a very strong group of Western authorities (Syr sin has to be added to those given by Tisch) ; but if they are retained in the text, the phrase irSts f) TI forms an important coincidence between Lk A and Mt, and may point to a Logian origin for both. Doublets I0 5 vp.lv o-Topa KOI vocpiav y ov bvvr}- eV CKCtvr) rfj &pa TOVTO XaXetre, (rovrat dvTKTTrjvui rj dvrenrelv ov yap ecrrf vp.fls ol XaXovi/Tfj- anavres ol avriKfipevoi vp.lv . aXXa TO jrvcvfjia TO ayiov. Mt X. 19, 2O orav 8e 7rapad>o-iv vp.as, p.f} fjLfpifj.v^o'rjTe TTCO? rj n \a\T]o-rjT' doOrjafTai yap vp.lv cv fKfivy TII eopa n XaXiJcr/jrc' ou yap {/pels e'are oi XaXovtres' dXXa TO Trvcvpa TOV Trarpbs vpS)V TO XaXoCi/ ev vplv. The Lucan diro\oyeop.ai (Lk 2, Acts 6, Paul 2 only) connects A and B. The chief resemblances are between Mk and Mt, though the passages are differently placed. In Mt it forms part of a longer passage placed by him in the charge to the Twelve, but hardly likely to have been spoken so early. As Lk B and Mk are parallel in position, it is curious that Lk, who speaks most often of the 'Holy Spirit' (p. 27), should omit Mk's words TO nvevpa TO ayiov there : but it occurs in Lk A. No. n. A. Lk xiv. 1 1 on iras 6 t TaiTiv(t)6rjo~Tai KUI 6 B. Lk xviii. 14 on iras 6 ty&v eavrbv r ft \ ^ O O Mt xxiii. I 2 oo-Tts Se v i, KOI ooris rane iva>- o~fi favTov Except for the conjunctions KM and 8e, Lk A and Lk B are identical. They agree against Mt in having Tray 6 with a participle, while he has oo-m with a verb. In Mt No. 2 (p. 83) the former con- struction marked the apparently Logian pair of passages ; but here all three are probably Logian. io6 Indications of Sources Ft. II The resemblance between Lk xvii. 31 and xxi. 21 has not been thought sufficient to constitute another Lucan doublet, but it is worth notice. Also the narratives in Lk v. 29, 30 and xv. i, 2 are remarkably similar. And Lk vi. 9 may be compared with xiv. 3 (to which, however, the parallel in Mt xii. 10 is more close) ; and viii. 21 with xi. 28. APPENDIX TO THE COLLECTION OF DOUBLETS The saying, ' He that hath ears, &c' Mt A. Mt xi. 15 6 fx wv ^ ra MtB. Mt xiii. 9 6 ^v ami MtC. Mt Xlii. 43 6 ^a>y aira Mk A. Mk IV. 9 os exei o>ra MkB. Mk iv. 23 ei TIS e a>ra aKove Lk A. Lk viii. 8 6 aira ttKOVflV dKOVfTO). LkB. Lk xiv. 35 6 e\ Q)V ^ As being used 3 times by Mt, and as being merely an adjunct to other sayings, this brief utterance was not included among the doublets. Each Gospel adheres to some peculiarity of form : Mt omits uKoveiv, Mk has the verb with aKoveiv, and Lk the participle with axoveiv, on each occasion. So it is to editors and not to sources that these variations are apparently to be ascribed. This was evidently a well-known proverbial phrase : it occurs in Rev ii. 7, n, 17, 29; Hi. 6, 13, 22 6 ?x a)V ^ s aKova-dru . . . , and Rev xiii. 9 et TIS e^ ovs d/couo-arw. With all those instances com- pare Mt's omission of aKoveiv, and with the last of them Mk B. iv Doublets 107 This is the most frequently repeated of the complete * sayings in the Gospels, as it occurs 7 times. 2 The next in order of frequency are ' Whosoever will save his life, &c.', 6 times including Jn xii. 25 (p. 87 f.) ; ' To him that hath, &c.' (p. 89), and ' Let him take up his cross, &c.' (p. 86), each 5 times. No other saying seems to occur oftener than 4 times. SECTION V THE SOURCE LARGELY USED BY MATTHEW AND LUKE, APART FROM MARK IN the first edition of this book (1899) tne title of the present Section was c The Logia of Matthew as a probable source '. Since then the scholars of England and America have largely followed those of Germany in designating this source as Q ( Quelle). For it has been generally admitted that to call it ' the Logia of Matthew ' was unfairly ' question-begging ', 3 as assuming that Matthew and Luke certainly used the document named by Papias (p. xiii). But the abandonment of that name in favour of the neutral symbol Q need not involve any intention of begging the question in the other direction, by ignoring the reasons for holding that the only two documents named by the earliest writer who deals with sources at all are the two which bulk so largely in our First and Third Gospels. 4 The exact or almost exact correspondence of some parallel passages of considerable extent (p. 66) and the use of not a few peculiar and unusual expressions (pp. 54 ff.) in both Gospels combine to make it highly probable that this Q was a written source. And the probability that it 1 ' There shall be weeping and gnashing, &c.,' occurring 7 times, is excluded, as being only a portion of various sayings (p. 170). 2 In the received text 8 times, but WH Tisch R omit Mk vii. 16. 3 So Dean Armitage Robinson, Study of the Gospels, pp. 69 f. 4 I venture to refer to the Expository Times, vol. xii, pp. 72 ff. and 139. io8 Indications of Sources pt. ii was used by the two Evangelists independently, and not by either of them through the other as an intermediary source, is not much lower, and is now very widely re- cognized. The only sure means of arriving at sound conclusions as to the nature and extent of the unfortunately non-existent Q is to collect and examine such passages l as are found in Matthew and Luke only, and are sufficiently parallel to give reasonable ground for supposing that they are drawn from the same original. I give such a list here, though not with any feeling of positiveness or even of self-consistency. For it is rather larger than the list which was offered in the first edition of this book, but considerably smaller than another which I am printing elsewhere, 2 my object there being to give every exclusively Matthaeo-Lucan parallel, however unlikely some of them may be to have had a common written origin. But it is only 3 by using, or making, some such list, that we can advance beyond guess- work as to Q. Mt iii. 7-10 = Lk iii. 7-9. ] Vltv. 39, 40, = Lk vi. 27-30, iii. 12 = iii. 17. 42, 44-8 32-6. iv. 3-11 = iv. 3-13- vi. 9-13 = xi. 2-4. v. i, 2, 3, 4,6 = Vi.20,2l(?). 10 Vi. 20, 21 xii. 33^, 34- V. II, 12 = vi. 22, 23. vi. 22, 23 xi. 34, 35. * v. 18 = xvi. 17. vi. 24 = xvi. 13. * v. 25, 26 = xii. 58, 59. vi. 25-33 = xii. 22-31. 1 The word ' passages' is used, for want of a better term, to include some shorter sentences than we usually designate by that name. 2 In a forthcoming volume of Studies in the Synoptic Problem, edited by Dr. Sanday (Clarendon Press). I have there worked out several points which are passed over either entirely or with slight allusion in this Section. 3 Perhaps an exception to this statement is supplied by Luke's collocation of sayings in xvi. 17, 18 ( = Mt v. 18 and 32), taken together with his 'But I say unto you which hear ' in vi. 27, when he had written nothing to suggest the contrast involved in ' but ' (dAAd) : it does seem to be thus doubly implied that Luke had before him, or at least knew, the comparisons between the old and new law of life in Mt v. 17-48, though he did not insert them in his Gospel. v Source used by Matthew and Luke 109 Mt vii. i, 2 = Lk vi. 37, 38. 45 *Mtxi. 25-7 Lkx. 21, 22. 15 vii. 3-5 = vi. 41, 42. * xii. 22, 23 5 = xi. 14. vii. 7-1 1 = xi. 9-13 . xii. 27, 28 = xi. 19, 20. * x vii. 12 = vi. 31. xii. 30 *"* xi. 23. * vii. 13, 14 2 = xiii. 23, 2 4 (?). D* xii. 33-5 = vi. 43-5- vii. 21 = vi. 46. 5 D xii. 38-42 = xi. 16,29-32. 20 * vii. 22, 23 - xiii. 25-7 xii. 43-5 xi. 24-6. (??). * xiii. 16, 17 i x. 23, 24. vii. 24-7 vi. 47-9. * xiii. 33 = xiii. 20, 21. viii. 5-10 = vii. 1-3, 6-9. * xv. 14 = vi. 39- * viii. ii, 12 = xiii. 28, 29. 55 D* xvii. 20 = xvii.6 6 (?). !* viii. 19, 20 - ix. 57, 58. * xviii. 7 = xvii. i. =5 * viii. 21, 22 = ix. 59, 60. * xviii. 12-14 = xv. 4, 5, 7. * ix. 37, 38 = X. 2. * xviii. 15 xvii. 3. * x. 7 = x. 96. ^ * xviii. 21, 22 = xvii. 4 (?). * x. 8 a = x. 9 a. 60 * xix. 28 = xxii. 28,30(7). * X. 10 rt = x. 4. * . xxiii. 4 = xi. 46. 30 * x. 10 b - x. 76. D* xxiii. 12 = xiv. 1 1 (and * X. II = x.8(cf.7) 1 * xviii. 14). * X. 12, 13 = x. 5, 6. II * xxiii. 13 (14 D* X. 15 = X. 12. 4) CJ .3 o in WH) = xi. 52- * x. i6# = x. 3 ' 5 * xxiii. 23 xi. 42. 35 * x. 24, 25 a = vi. 40 3 (?). 6 5 * xxiii. 25, 26 = xi. 39, 41. * x. 26-33 = xii. 2-9. * xxiii. 27 = xi. 44 (W). * x. 34-6 - xii. 51- * xxiii. 29-31 xi. 47, 48. 5 *x. 3 7 = xiv. 26 (?). * xxiii. 34-6 = xi. 49-51. i D* x. 38 = xiv. 27 (?). * xxiii. 37-9 = xiii. 34, 35- 40 * x. 40 = x. 16* (?). 7 0* xxiv. 27 = xvii. 24. xi. 2,3, 4-1 1 = vii. 18 J 9> * xxiv. 28 = xvii. 37. 22-8. * xxiv. 37-9 = xvii. 26, 27. * xi. 12, 13 xvi. 1 6. * xxiv. 40, 41 = xvii.34,35(?). xi. 16-19 = vii. 31-5. 74 * xxiv. 43-5 1 a = xii. 39, 40, * xi. 21-4 = x. 12-15. 42-6. The asterisk denotes some difference of position in the two Gospels. 1 In this case the change of position is within the limits of the same discourse. 2 Mt vii. i6-i8 = Lk vi. 43-4 might have been expected to be the next entry ; but the Lucan passage is so much more similar in wording (though not in position) to Mt xii. 33-5 that it is entered opposite to those verses. 3 Compare also Jn xiii. 16 ; xv. 20. * Compare also Jn xiii. 20. This and the preceding note help to show us that various forms how many we know not of the same saying were current in the Church. 5 See also Mt ix. 32, 33, [34], which is closer in language to the Lucan parallel, though placed in a different context. 6 The remarkable expression, < faith as a grain of mustard seed,' occurs only in these two passages, not in Mk xi. 23, Mt xxi. 21, which are apparently of Marcan origin. See p. 89 f. no Indications of Sources Pt. n In the passages marked D there are complications caused by the existence of doublets (also in Mt x. 26 = Lk xii. 2, though not in the rest of the passage combined with them). If Mt xvi. 2, 3 and xxi. 44 had not been omitted as almost certainly spurious, the parallels to them would have been Lk xii. 54-6 (?) and xx. 18 respectively. In the above list of passages from Matthew there are contained 188 verses and 6 parts of others; putting these together we may reckon them as about 191 verses, or rather more than one-sixth of the 1,068 verses of Matthew. From Luke are drawn 179 verses and 4 parts of verses, which similarly we may reckon together as 181 verses, being less than one-sixth of the 1,149 verses of Luke. If we were to include, as many would do, the partially corresponding parables J of the Marriage of the King's Son and the Great Supper (Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-24), and of the Talents and the Pounds (Mt xxv. 14-30, Lk xix. 11-27), there would be an addition of (lo-f 17 =) 27 verses in each case, raising the numbers in Matthew to 218 and in Luke to 208. But such reckoning by verses is of course rough and un- satisfactory ; and it is better to regard the above parallels as seventy-four separate or separable passages. Fifty-six of these, or more than two-thirds, are more or less differ- ently placed in the two Gospels, and are therefore marked * in the list. Passages which seemed at all likely to have been derived from Mark were excluded from the list. But of course it is quite possible, and it has been suggested in the preceding 1 It seemed to me on the whole that these partial correspondences were not sufficient to outweigh the differences of occasion and object in these Parables, so I have placed them in the lists of passages peculiar to Matthew and Luke, with queries (?) attached to them in each case (pp. 3 and 15). Harnack (Sayings of Jesus, E. T., pp. 118-26) relegates them to an Appendix, in company with the imperfect parallel in Mt xxi. 32 and Lk vii. 29, 30. v Source used by Matthew and Luke in Section, that some of the sayings omitted on that ground may have been handed down in variant forms through Mark and Q independently of one another. If this is thought to be fairly probable, the following passages might be ranked as drawn from Q or Logia : Mt v. 13 = Lk xiv. 34 f. ; Mt v. 15 = Lk xi. 33 (?) ; Mt v. 32 = Lk xvi. 18 ; Mt xxv. 29 = Lk xix. 26 ; and perhaps some others mentioned above among the doublets, as Mt x. 39 == xvii. 33; Mt xxiii. ii = Lk xxii. 26 (?) (pp. 87, 91). Again, in two cases some details introductory to sayings have been excluded as due to Luke (Lk vii. 3, 4, 5, and 20, 21); but on the other hand they may have been in Q, and their omission by Matthew may be owing to his habit of shortening narratives (pp. 158 ff.). For those and other reasons exactness and completeness are by no means claimed for the above list. It contains a speculative .element which, it is hoped, has been absent from the previous tables in this book, and the compiler of it has had to use his own discretion on several .points as to which tlwe can be no certainty in the present state of our knowledge. But, such as it is, it may be offered for use at least tentatively and in the way of a working hypothesis. And if it is so used it supplies the following intimations, or at least suggestions, as to the contents of Q l : (i) If and it is an important if the whole of Q was homogeneous with the parts that have been preserved for us in Matthew and Luke, it consisted almost exclusively of sayings of Jesus, introduced, when necessary, by explana- tions of the occasions on which they were spoken. This description does not cover the first two passages, which contain records of the Baptist's teaching. These, however, may have been prefixed in order to explain and account for the subsequent references to the Baptist in the sayings 1 The general probabilities as to Q are very clearly summed up by Jijlicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 354-60. 112 Indications of Sources Pt. n of Jesus (Mt xi. 2-19, perhaps also xxi. 31 f., and parallels). 1 (ii) Sayings belonging to the period of the Passion- narrative do not seem to have been included in Q. The only reference to that period in the above list is Lk xxii. 28, 30 ; and in that case the few words identical in both Gospels seem to be better placed in Mt xix. 28. (iii) With the one important exception of the general arrangement of the Sermons on the Mount (Mt v-vii) and on the Level Place (Lk vi. 20 ff.) the two compilers, or at any rate one of them, did not regard the sayings in Q as placed in chronological order or at least they, or he, did not attach importance to the order in which they found them. This appears from the fact, already mentioned, that more than two-thirds of the passages are placed more or less differently by Matthew and Luke. (iv) If we agree to exclude, as above, the two pairs of parables in Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-34, and in Mt xxv. 14-30 and Lk xix. 11-27 from Q, we find in it no parables of any considerable length. We must attribute to it, how- ever, the brief parables of the Lost Sheep and of the Leaven (and not improbably of the Mustard Seed also), besides many which we may call similitudes rather than parables. The very interesting and important, but unsolved and probably insoluble inquiry as to whether the First or the Third Gospel is the more exact and faithful representative to us. of Q cannot be. entered upon here. To use Well- hausen's words, ' Die Frage, ob Q bei Matthaus oder bei Lukas ursprunglicher erhalten sei, lasst sich nicht rund beantworten.' 2 Harnack, who discusses the matter very 1 But there are also some reasons for thinking that these records of the Baptist's teaching may not be drawn from Q, but may have belonged to the original tradition generally used in our Second Gospel, though omitted from it in this particular case. So Woods in Studia Biblica, ii. 85, 94 ; Stanton in Enc. Brit., xxix. 41. 2 Einleitung in die drei ersten Evangelien, p. 67 ; see his following pages. v Source used by Matthew and Luke 113 thoroughly, gives the preference to Matthew, though re- garding most of Luke's alterations as merely stylistic. 1 The relative priority of the two great sources of the First and Third Gospels is another moot point ; Wellhausen 2 regards Mark, Harnack 3 regards Q as the older. Sir W. M. Ramsay 4 thinks so highly of the antiquity of Q that he considers it likely to have been ' written while Christ was still living '. If, as was above shown, the source which forms the subject of this Section supplies about one-sixth of each of the Gospels in which it is used, it might reasonably have been expected that words and expressions characteristic of that source could be found and noticed, in the way that characteristics of the Priestly Code have been observed in the composite Hexateuch. 5 But it seems to me that such linguistic evidence is wanting here : with the exception of words which are required by the special subject-matter, a renewed examination has failed to produce any expressions which I could definitely label as characteristic of Q. 6 This failure does not, of course, disprove the use of Q as a source; but it does strongly support the view, which the tables on pp. 4-8, 16-23 suggested, that both Matthew and Luke, and especially Luke, have so ' worked over ' the sources they employed that their Gospels frequently represent to us the substance rather than the words of the original documents. 1 See Sprtiche und Reden Jesu, translated as The Sayings of Jesus, pp. i- 126 passim, especially 112-15. 2 Op. tit., pp. 73 ff., especially 87. 3 Op. tit., pp. 193 ff. (E. T.). * In his Luke the Physician, &c., p. 89. 5 See Carpenter and Harford-Battersby's Hexateuch, vol. i, pp. 61 ff., 183 ff. ; Driver's Genesis, pp. vi ff. of Introduction. 6 Harnack writes similarly as to the vocabulary (op. tit., pp. 146, 152) ; but he finds ' a certain unity of grammatical and stylistic colouring ' in the passages which he assigns to Q (pp. 162 f.). PART III FURTHER STATISTICS AND OBSERVATIONS BEARING ON THE ORIGIN AND COMPOSITION OF EACH GOSPEL A. ON THE GOSPEL OF ST. MARK. IT is well to take this Gospel first, as being almost certainly the earliest in date and quite certainly the simplest in structure. I propose to examine the portions of Mark which are not found in Matthew or Luke. 1 Though numerous, they are in most cases very brief, the chief exceptions to this brevity being the two miracles in vii. 32-7 ; viii. 22-6, and the parable in iv. 26-9. What gives interest and importance to these portions, even in their minute details, is the theory, now very generally held, that a source corresponding on the whole with our present Gospel of St, Mark was used by the other two Synoptists as a basis or Grundschrift^ to which they added introductions, insertions and conclusions derived from other sources. For English readers this view is clearly explained and effectively supported by Mr. F. H. Woods in Studia Biblica : 2 his arguments 3 seem to me to lead 1 In English they are brought together, in a way very convenient for reference, in the left-hand column of The Common Tradition of the Synoptic Gospels, by Abbott and Rushbrooke (London, 1884) ; in Greek they can be most easily collected by taking note of the ordinary type in the first column of Rushbrooke's Synopticon. * Vol. ii (Oxford, 1890). The same view is well expressed and illustrated by Julicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 348 if. 3 The most simple and impressive of them rests on the fact that ' the order of the whole of St. Mark, except of course what is peculiar to that Gospel, is confirmed either by St. Matthew or St. Luke, and the greater part of it by both' (p. 61). The different placing of a quotation in Mk i. 2 and in Mt xi. 10, Lk xi. 27 can hardly be called an exception. pt. in. A S/. Mark's Gospel 115 irresistibly to the result which he thus expresses, ' We conclude, therefore, that the common tradition upon which all the three Synoptics were based is substantially our St. Mark as far as matter, general form, and order are concerned ' (p. 94). But this conclusion, which may now (1909) be called a practically certain result of modern study of the ' Synoptic Problem ', at once suggests a further question. What is the account to be given of the Marcan matter which neither Matthew nor Luke has incorporated, and which therefore lies before us as peculiar to Mark ? It might be accounted for in two ways. Either (a) Matthew and Luke were ignorant of it, because it was added to the Marcan source at a time later than the date or dates at which they used it; or (b) it was before them, but was omitted or altered either by them when they transferred the other Marcan matter to their Gospels, or in the course of the subsequent use of those Gospels. In other words, did those compilers use an Ur-Marctis (to use the brief convenient German name for an original and probably shorter Mark which was altered and supplemented by a later editor), or did they use a source closely corresponding with our present Gospel of St. Mark ? As a contribution towards the study of this question, I propose to bring together and classify the Marcan peculiarities, so that we may see how far they are such as would be likely to be omitted or altered. The stronger such likelihood is, and the larger the number of instances to which it extends, the greater will be the weight of evidence against the suggestion of an Ur-Marcus. For indeed it is only a suggestion to account for the phenomena which we are now considering : there is no external support for it in the words of Papias, 1 nor, I think, is there any 1 Unless, indeed, it is thought that his phrase ov H&TOI raei implies a less orderly arrangement of materials than We find in this Gospel. But, I 2 n6 Statistics and Observations pt. in. A internal evidence for it in the signs of compilation which some students believe they can detect even in this Gospel. Of such signs the most remarkable is perhaps that on which Wendt * has laid stress, viz. the apparent resumption in xii. 13 of the narrative in iii. 6 about the Pharisees and Herodians. This may imply a collection of replies made by Jesus to questions and objections, of which Mark was making use, and from which he broke off in iii. 6 to return to it in xii. 13. And a good case for the arrangement of various materials may be made as to chapter iv, and still more as to chapter ix, 2 and again as to chapter xiii, where Colani's suggestion of the insertion of several verses from a presumably Jewish apocalypse has met with acceptance in many quarters. 3 But such compilation must have been prior to that use of Mark by Matthew and Luke which the hypothesis before us involves. 4 In referring to the Marcan peculiarities it will be best to begin with those which have most to do with the substance of the narrative, and from them to pass on to those which are mainly or entirely linguistic. As an introduction to Section I, A and B, I quote some remarks of Dr. A. B. Bruce on this Gospel : ' It contains even in that case, the re-arrangement must have taken place before the time to which our hypothesis refers. 1 See his Teaching of Jesus, E. T., i. 21. 2 See especially Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl., ii. 1864 ff. 8 See, for instance, Wendt, Teaching of Jesus, E. T., ii. 278, 358, 366, where he summarizes what he had said more fully in the untranslated part of his work, Lehre Jesu i. loff. ; and Charles, Eschatology (1899), pp. 323-9. The verses generally regarded as insertions from the ' little Apocalypse ' are Mk xiii. 7, 8, 14-20, 24-7, 30, 31, and the parallels in Mt and Lk. 4 Might not Mark himself after Peter's death have been the person who re-arranged (perhaps not always very carefully or skilfully) the groups of reminiscences which he had taken down from the lips of Peter in earlier years ? This would help to reconcile the impression given by Papias (see above, p. xiii) with the express statement of Irenaeus(//a^r. iii. i) that it was after the death of Peter and Paul that Mark ' handed down to us in writing what Peter used to preach '. These and other patristic traditions relating to the Second Gospel are brought together by Scott-Moncreiff, St. Mark and the Triple Tradition, pp. 100-8. pt. in. A 5/. Mark's Gospel 117 unmistakable internal marks of a relatively early date. These marks are such as to suggest an eye and ear witness as the source of many narratives, and a narrator unem- barrassed by reverence. This feeling we know does come into play in biographical delineations of men whose charac- ters have become invested with sacredness, and its influence grows with time. The high esteem in which they are held more or less controls biographers, and begets a tendency to leave out humble facts and tone down traits indicative of pronounced individuality ' ( With Open Face, p. 25). SECTION I PASSAGES WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN OMITTED OR ALTERED AS BEING LIABLE TO BE MISUNDERSTOOD, OR TO GIVE OFFENCE, OR TO SUGGEST DIFFICULTIES 1 A. Passages seeming (a) to limit the power of Jesus Christ, or (6) to be otherwise derogatory to, or unworthy of, Him. (a) Mk i. 32, 34 ' They brought unto him all that were sick . . . and he healed many that were sick', compared with Mt viii. 16 'He . . . healed all that were sick ', and Lk iv. 40 ' He laid his hands on every one of them and healed them '. Here Mark's description might be thought to imply what Paley calls ' tentative miracles ; that is, where out of a great number of trials, some succeeded '. 2 So also in Mk iii. 10 ' many*, compared with Mt xii. 15; Lk vi. 19 'all '. 2. Mk iv. 36 : it might be wondered how the ' other boats ' weathered the storm. (Perhaps however Mark did not mean to imply that these also crossed the lake.) 1 Cf. Dr. Abbott's art. Gospels in Ettc. Brit., x. 802, from which several of these instances were taken. 2 Evidences of Christianity, Part I, prop, ii, chap. i. u8 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A 3- Mk vi. 5 'He could (cdvvaro) there do no mighty work, save, &c.', compared with Mt xiii. 58 ' He did not many mighty works there because of their unbelief. (Perhaps too the omission by Mt of the sentence in Mk vii. 24 containing the words OVK rjdvvaa-drj \afalv may be due to the desire not to suggest inability of any kind. Compare also Mk i. 45 (/iqKc'rc SvvavOai) with Lk v. 16.) 4- Mk vii. 32-7 : the use of spittle as a means of healing (cf. also Jn ix. 6). And perhaps painful effort might seem to be implied in the words ' looking up to heaven he sighed '. (Compare avrov in Mk viii. 12, omitted in Mt xvi. 2.) 5- Mk viii. 22-6: in this miracle also spittle is used as a means; 1 and the cure is represented as gradual. 2 6. Mk xi. 20 : the statement that the withering of the fig-tree was not noticed until the next morning might be dropped as obscuring the signal character of the miracle. Cf. Mt xxi. 19 and 20 7- Mk xv. 44, 45 a ' Pilate marvelled if he were already dead, &c.' It might have been thought at least needless to introduce this question into ordinary teaching. w i. Mk i. 1 1 ' Thou art my beloved Son, &c.', said to Jesus : more public honour seems to be done to Him by the proclamation con- cerning Him, ' This is my beloved Son, &c.' in Mt iii. 17. Luke 1 These two are ' the only cases in the Synoptic Gospels in which Jesus employs any other means than the laying on of hands ' (Gould, Comm. on Mark, p. 149). The Apostles are said to have 'anointed with oil many that were sick ' in Mk vi. 13 : cf. James v. 14. 2 Similarly, the cure of the lunatic boy in Mk ix. 20-7 appears more gradual than in Mt xvii. 18 or Lk ix. 42. And see Allen, St. Matt., p. xxxiii, on the omission of Mk i. 23-8 by Mt. i St. Mark's Gospel 119 however follows Mark. (Compare the revelation said in John i. 33 to have been made to the Baptist at this time.) 2. Mk i. 1 2 ' The spirit driveth him forth (eK/3aXA) ' : it is not surprising that Matthew and Luke express this guidance by the less forcible words avyfy and jj 3- Mk iii. 5 ' With anger '. Matthew and Luke omit this, though the latter (vi. 10) preserves the nept^\\^d^fvos which goes with it in Mark. opyrj is nowhere else in the Gospels ascribed to Jesus, except in a Western reading of Mk i. 41 (opyia-deis) : cf., however, Rev vi. 16. 4- Mk iii. 21 * His friends . . . went out to lay hold on him, for they said, He is beside himself (efc'ony) V 5- Mk v. 7 ' I adjure thee by God ' : it is only in this one of the three narratives that the unclean spirit dares to adjure Jesus (6pKio>). 6. Mk vi. 3 ' Is not this the carpenter? ' See, however, also p. 75. 7- Mk vi. 48 * He would have (fjdf\ev) passed by them '. There might have been fear of this being taken to mean that He did not wish, or intend, to help them. 8. Mk vii. 9 ' Full well (aXo$) do ye reject the commandment of God '. This irony is replaced in Mt xv. 3 by the graver question, ' Why do ye also transgress the commandment . . . ? ' 9- Mk x. 14 ' He was moved with indignation (^ycn/aKr^o-ev) '. Else- where this verb always implies more or less blameworthy anger, Mt xx. 24; xxi. 15; xxvi. 8; Mk x. 41 ; xiv. 4; Lk xiii. 14. 1 The reading in D* l^eVrarat aurous, a b d ff 2 i q exentiat (exsentiat) eos, &c., is probably an attempt to avoid the difficulty. 120 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A 10. Mk x. 17, 1 8 ' Good Master' and ' Why callest thou me good?' appear in Mt xix. 16, 17 as ' Master' and 'Why askest thou me concerning that which is good ? ' But Luke follows Mark. ii. Mk xi. 3 ' Straightway he will send him back hither '. This might- seem, and has seemed (see Dr. A. B. Bruce in loc., and Speaker's Comm.}, to detract from the dignity of the request, and from the importance of the impression made by it ; * hence perhaps the change of it to ' straightway he (the owner) will send them ', in Mt xxi. 3, as also in the received text even of Mark. See also p. 70. 12. Mk xi. 13 ' For it was not the season of figs '. This may have seemed, and has seemed to some, to imply an unjustifiable, or at least ignorant, expectation and consequent disappointment. We may perhaps compare edavpao-fv in Mk vi. 6, omitted in Mt xiii. 58 (but cf. Mt viii. 10 ; Lk vii. 9). Mk xii. 32 ' Of a truth, Master, thou hast well said. &c.' : it has been suggested that these words of the scribe may have seemed to a later editor ' somewhat patronizing ', and may therefore have been omitted after Mt xxii. 40 (Allen in toe.). 14. Mk xiv. 14 'Where is my guest-chamber?' This may have seemed a harshly expressed claim, and therefore the pov may have been omitted from Lk xxii. 1 1 which is otherwise identical with Mark (Matthew has no parallel clause, but cf. xxvi. 18). It has also dropped out from the received text of Mark. Mk xiv. 58 ' We heard him say, I will destroy this temple, &c.' This, though only an accusation by the * false witnesses ' (cf. John 1 < It certainly weakens the miraculous impression produced by the pre- dicted success of the demand when we learn that no more was asked for than a loan with the promise of immediate return' (Salmon, Human Element in the Gospels, p. 425). i 5/. Mark's Gospel 121 ii. 19), may have appeared to be an unfulfilled prophecy, or pos- sibly to have justified Jewish hostility, and may therefore have been softened into ' I am able to destroy the temple of God ', Mt xxvi. 61. (There is no parallel in Luke.) B. Passages seeming to disparage the attainments or character of the Apostles. 1 i. Mk iv. 13 'Know ye not this parable ? and how shall ye know all the parables ? ' This reference to dullness in the disciples them- selves is found only in Mark. 2. Mk iv. 38 ' Carest thou not that we perish?' seems more ex- pressive of distrust than the 'Save, we perish' of Mt viii. 25, or the ' We perish ' of Lk viii. 24. (Compare the use of ou /ze'Xet in Lk x. 40; Jn x. 13.) 3- Mk v. 3 1 ( . . . And sayest thou, Who touched me ? ' This ques- tion, omitted by Matthew and Luke (but implied in Lk viii. 46), may have been thought disrespectful from the disciples to their Master. 4- Mk vi. 51 3, 52 'And they were sore amazed in themselves, for they understood not 2 concerning the loaves, but their heart was hardened '. 3 There is no parallel to this in Matthew (cf., however, his record of the weakness of Peter's faith in xiv. 28-33). Luke is wanting here. (To Mk vii. 18 there is a parallel in Mt xv. 16; Luke is wanting here also.) 5- Mk viii. 17, 1 8 'Have ye your heart hardened? 3 Having eyes, 1 Those who had come, or were coming, to regard the Twelve as 'founda- tions' of the Church (Rev xxi. 14) would be far more likely to soften or leave out than to strengthen or insert such passages. It has been noticed that Luke especially ' spares the Twelve ' : see Bruce in Expositor's Greek Test., i. 46 f., referring to Schanz. Cf. p. 197 below. 2 With Matthew's omission of ou avvT\Ka.v here, compare his insertions of TOTC avvrJKav in xvi. 12, xvii. 13. 3 Or rather ' blinded ', which seems to be the better rendering of nupovv, irwpctiffis. See Dean Armitage Robinson, Comm. on Eph., p. 266. As he says, ' " hardneos" suggests a wilful obstinacy, which would scarcely be in place in ' either of these two sayings. 122 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A see ye not? and having ears, hear ye not?' This is omitted in Matthew's version of the rebuke (xvi. 8-n). Luke is wanting here. 6. Mk ix. 38 ' We forbade him, because he followed not us ' becomes in Lk ix. 49 ' because he followeth not with us ', which involves less claim to personal authority on the part of the speaker (John). Matthew omits the incident. 7- Mk x. 35 : here the sons of Zebedee themselves make, but in Mt xx. 20 their mother makes, the ambitious request. Luke omits it altogether. C. Other passages which might cause offence or difficulty. i. Mk ii. 23 6dov noiflv (WH mg 68o7rote>). This phrase, though not necessarily (see Judg xvii. 8) meaning that they broke a new path through the standing corn, might be taken to imply that they did so. 1 2. Mk ii. 26 ' When Abiathar was high priest '. This was probably omitted on account of the historical difficulty : see, however, also p. 131 on the Proper Names in this Gospel. 3- Mk ii. 27 ' The sabbath was made for man, and not man for the sabbath '. This may perhaps have been ' a hard saying ' for Jewish Christians, 2 and may therefore have dropped out of use, though here it forms a step in the argument, which is not the case with the words substituted in Mt xii. 6, 7. In Luke there is nothing substituted, but a break seems to be implied (vi. 5). Mk iii. 29 '. . . But is guilty of an eternal sin ', an expression so mysterious and so much deeper than the usual idea of punishment, that A-aTraros has been altered into Kio-evs in the received text. 1 See Field's Notes on Transl. ofN. T. in loc. (p. 25). 2 Cf. Rom xiv. 5 f. ; Gal iv. 10 ; Col ii. i6f. i S/. Mark's Gospel 123 And a similar account may probably be given of the omission of the whole clause in Mt xii. 32 and Lk xii. lo. 1 Mk iv. 12 * That (iva) seeing they may see, and not perceive, &c.' For this Mt xiii. 1 4 has the easier ' because (on) '. Luke however follows Mark. 6. Mk iv. 26-9 the Parable of the Seed Growing Secretly. Might there not have been fear of this discouraging activity and watch- fulness in missionary and pastoral work ? See End. BibL, ii. 1863. 7- Mk viii. 31 ; ix. 31 ; x. 34 ' After three days'. In the parallel passages Matthew (xvi. 21; xvii. 23; xx. 19) and Luke (ix. 22; xviii. 33, there being no parallel to Mk ix. 3 1 ). substitute 'on the third day ' ; probably because the exactness of the prophecy would not otherwise be evident to persons unaccustomed to the Jewish method of computation (see e. g. Gen xlii. 17, 18 ; i Ki xii. 5, 12 ; Mt xxvii. 63, 64 : cf. Hos vi. 2). 2 8. Mk viii. 32 ' And he spake the saying openly '. A difficult state- ment ; for (a) if napprja-ia means plainly and unreservedly, it might be thought strange that the resurrection should have been so unex- pected when it occurred ; and (6) if it means that the announcement was made to others besides ' the disciples ', this seems most unlikely at this period, and indeed inconsistent with verse 34, which speaks of the multitude as not being summoned until after this prediction had been given. 9- Mk viii. 38 ' In this adulterous and sinful generation ' might be omitted as seeming to narrow the application of the warning against being ' ashamed of Christ. 1 Compare the case of the obscure verse Mk ix. 49 ' For every one shall be salted with fire ', to which the Western text makes an addition (from Lev ii. 13) which seems to have been meant as explanatory, and which afterwards became part of the ' Syrian ' text. 3 For other cases see Field, of. cit., p. 13. 124 Statistics and Observations Ft. in. A 10. Mk ix. 13 * Even as it is written of him '. It is by no means clear how the ill-treatment of the Baptist had been ' written of. Matthew avoids the difficulty by dropping the words. ii. Mk ix. 15 'All the multitude, when they saw him, were greatly amazed '. It is very difficult to see what could have been the special cause of the amazement at this time, for any outward radiance result- ing from the Transfiguration is most unlikely ; and the statement is omitted by Matthew and Luke. f 12. Mk ix. 22 b-24 ' If thou canst do anything . . . Help thou mine unbelief '. The fact that the father's prayer was granted, notwith- standing these confessions of doubt, may have seemed to imply the acceptance of a lower standard of faith than the Church usually required ; hence perhaps the omission of this dialogue. Mk ix. 31 ' The Son of man is delivered up '. A prophetic present: but the /ze'AAei irapadiftoo-dai of Mt xvii. 22 and Lk ix. 44 is clearer and more obvious. (Similarly the 6 ey/m. Matthew, Luke, and John use only aa^a in this narrative : see Swete's note, showing that irrS^a was a word likely to be avoided here by Christians (as indeed it is in the re- i 5/. Mark's Gospel 125 ceived text even of Mark), because ' when employed for the dead body of a human being it carries a tone of contempt '. Mk xv. 25 ' It was the third hour' : for proofs that this note of time, which Mark alone gives, has caused difficulties, see e. g. Speaker s Comm. in loc. SECTION II ENLARGEMENTS OF THE NARRATIVE, WHICH ADD NOTHING TO THE INFORMATION CONVEYED BY IT, BECAUSE THEY ARE EXPRESSED AGAIN, OR ARE DIRECTLY INVOLVED, IN THE CONTEXT These, which have been well named 'context-supple- ments ', are very numerous in Mark, especially in the earlier chapters. They occur both in the actual narrative and in sayings which it embodies. The nature of them may be understood from the following two specimens : (a) In ii. 18 a Mark alone says that 'John's disciples and the Pharisees were fasting ' : but this fact is again stated in the question put to Jesus in i83, which is also recorded in substance in Mt ix. 14 ; Lk v. 33. (b) In xv. 24 Mark alone adds to the mention of casting lots the words ' upon them, which each should take ' : but this is of course involved in the previous statement of all three Synoptists that they ' parted his garments among them, casting lots '. I do not propose to print a list of such repetitions and amplifications, for it would be necessary in many cases to print with them a lengthy context, without which it could not be seen that they add nothing to the narrative. But instances, more or less distinct and characteristic, may be found and examined in the following verses, numbering more than a hundred : Mk i. 4, 7, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 28, 126 Statistics and Observations pt. in. A 34, 43* ; ii. i, 2f, 8 , 9, i5t, l6 t, i8t, 19! J "i- 8, 13. *7, * 8 , 30, 31 ; iv. I, 2, 7, 8, 15, r6, 24, 31, 32, 37, 39 ; v. i, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 34, 3 8 > 40, 4^ ; vi. 2, 4, 17, 39, 35. 44, 5, 53> 54, 55 ; vii. 2, 8* 13, 14, 15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25! ; viii. if, 15, 27 ; ix. 2, 8 ; x. 27, 32, 36, 52 ; xi. 2, 4, 6, 15, 27, 28 ; xii. 2, 14, aif, 4iti 43t 5 xiii - 2, J 9> 2O ; xiv. 4, 5, 7, 11,15, 1 6, 17, 20, 43, 45, 57, 66 ; xv. 22, 24t, 25, 34. In the two cases marked * the whole verse may be called a context-supplement, and so may perhaps also iii. 30 : the mark f has been added to a few other instances, which, with those marked *, may be considered first as the most instructive and interesting cases. A few of the passages here referred to are also included among the 'duplicate expressions' on pp. 139 ft". below. Now in a simple and original narrative, written or dictated by, or directly derived from an eyewitness, such repetitions and expatiations might very naturally occur : they may indeed be due to that special determination to ' omit nothing ' which Papias attributes to Mark as the 'interpreter of Peter'. And the omission of them after- wards, either in the compilation of a manuscript record or in the course of oral teaching, is also natural and likely. But what possible cause for the insertion of them by a later editor can be assigned, except a mere wish to extend the size of the narrative, without adding to its substance? And surely such a wish is inconceivable in the times and circumstances of the composition of the Gospels. 1 1 Of course there has been no intention of denying in this Section that there are any 'context-supplements' peculiar to Matthew and to Luke respectively (see e. g. Mt xiv. 16; xv. 20 ; Lk vi. 8 ; viii. 27, 53) ; but they are certainly very few in comparison with those in Mark. m S/. Mark's Gospel 127 SECTION III MINOR ADDITIONS TO THE NARRATIVE I use the word * minor ' of the Marcan additions now referred to, in order to denote this characteristic of them, that though they add fullness to the narrative, and though they are almost always more or less graphic and picturesque and lifelike, they are not such as would seem important to those who had to teach the elements of Christianity. So far as we can judge from our earliest records, ' the memoirs of the Apostles ' were chiefly drawn upon for the purposes of (i) exhibiting ' Jesus of Nazareth ' as ' approved of God by mighty works and wonders and signs' (Acts ii. 23), and (ii) of supplying accounts of His teaching, especially on moral subjects (see e.g. Rom xii ; James iv ; Clem. Rom. xiii ; Ep. Polycarp ii ; Didache i). 1 There would be no materials available for these purposes, nor again for the proofs of the Messiahship of Jesus drawn from prophecy for Jewish hearers, nor again for the articles of the Creed which soon began to grow out of the baptismal confession of faith, in the very great majority of these Marcan augmentations. The following are characteristic specimens of them : i. 33 ' All the city was gathered together at the door*, iii. 9 ' He spake to his disciples that a little boat should wait on him because of the crowd, lest they should throng him '. 2 iii. 34 ' Looking round on them which sat round about him '. iv. 35 ' When even was come '. iv. 38 ' In the stern . . . on the cushion '. 1 And so Irenaeus says that he had heard Polycarp relate what he had heard from eyewitnesses of the Lord trepl rwv Sum/uecuj/ avrov KCU irepl TTJJ SiSaaKaXias. Eus., H. E., V. xx, quoting Irenaeus' Epistle to Florinus. 3 How natural that Peter should recall this precaution, and that there- fore Mark should write it down : yet how likely that other teachers and writers should omit it, since it appears that after all there was no recourse to the boat on this occasion (cf. v. 13 ' he goeth up into the mountain ') ! 128 Statistics and Observations Ft. in. A viii. 14 ' They had not in the boat with them more than one loaf. ix. 36 ' Taking him in his arms '. x. 50 ' He, casting away his garment, sprang up '. And others may be examined in the following verses : i. 19, 20, 29, 41 ; ii. 15; iii. 19, 20, 23, 32; v. 3, 6, 19, 21, 27, 32; vi. 21, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33, 38, 40, 56; vii. 24, 25; viii. n, 12, 27, 32, 33 ; ix. 3, 14, 15, 16, 26, 34, 35 ; x. i, 16, 17, 2i, 22, 23,46,49; xi. 4, 11,30; xii. 35,41,43; xiii - 3; xiv. 3, 40, 4i, 44, 54 ; xv. 8, 31, 31, 32. 1 Here again, as in the previous Section, the consideration of such passages seems to me to leave on the mind a very strong impression in favour of their having been dropped by compilers who presumably had in view the needs of Christian teachers and learners, and against their having been inserted by an editor of the Ur- Marcus. But, in both classes of cases ( II and III), there may seem to be one serious objection to this view. It appears at first sight extremely improbable that Matthew and Luke, even though influenced by the same motive, viz. the adaptation of the Marcan narrative for the practical use of teachers, should have agreed in the omission of so very many phrases and details. But this improbability becomes slighter when we observe that this agreement in omission is by no means complete and uniform. Our business in these two Sections has been to take note of words and passages as to which Mark stands alone. But it is to be also remembered that there are a good many cases in which Luke retains, while Matthew omits, both the ' con- text-supplements ' and the unimportant additional details of the Marcan document. There are also some cases in which Matthew retains, while Luke omits ; but these are 1 Perhaps too some statements of Mark alone to the effect that the explanations of certain sayings, &c., were given to the Apostles subse- quently and privately might come under this heading : see Mk iv. 10, 34 ; vii. 17; ix. 28,33 ; x. 10. m S/. Mark's Gospel 129 not so many, for, as will be seen (p. 158), Matthew has a much stronger tendency than Luke to shorten narratives and in this respect to depart from the model of Mark. A glance in Rushbrooke's Synopticon at the passages named in the two lists which follow, will supply some proofs of what has just been said, and will show that there are differences, as well as agreements, between Matthew and Luke, which must be taken into account in forming an estimate of what the Gospel of Mark was when they used it as a source. Those marked * are of the nature of ' con- text-supplements ' ; the rest are additional details, some- times graphic and lifelike, but never religiously or morally important. 1 LIST I. Luke, follows Mark in retaining^ while Matthew omits: *i. Mk i. 44 ; Lk v. 14 : ' for thy cleansing.' *2. Mk ii. 7 ; Lk v. 21 : 'who can forgive sins, c/ (which is in- volved in ' blasphemeth '). 3. Mk iii. 3 ; Lk vi. 8 : the man with the withered hand called to ' stand forth '. 4. Mk iii. 5 ; Lk vi. 10 : 'he looked round about on them/ *5- Mk iv. 41 ; Lk viii. 25 :' one to another/ 6. Mk v. 4 ; Lk viii. 29 : the attempts to bind the demoniac. 7. Mk v. 15 ; Lk viii. 35 : ' sitting, clothed and in his right mind/ 8. Mk v. 30 ; Lk viii. 45 : ' Jesus . . . said . . . Who touched, &c/ *9. Mk x. 20 ; Lk xviii. 21 :' from my youth/ 10. Mk x. 30 ; Lk xviii. 30 : 'in this time ... in the world to come/ 11. Mk x. 47 ; Lk xviii. 37 : 'of Nazareth/ *i2. Mk x. 48 ; Lk xviii. 39 : ' the more a great deal/ 1 3. Mk xi. 5, 6 ; Lk xix. 32-4 : ' what do ye, loosing the colt, &c.' 14. Mk xiv. 13-15; Lk xxii. 10-12 : the man with a pitcher of water, &c. 1 Compare Nestle's interesting remarks on the evidence supplied by textual criticism in support of his view that ' the Gospel was originally narrated in a much more vivacious style ' than that in which most of our present authorities present it to us (Textual Criticism of Greek N. T., E. T., pp. 192-6). 130 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A 15. Mk xv. 21 ; Lk xxiii. 26 : 'from the country.' To which may be added the following taken from the list (pp. 139 if.) of 'duplicate expressions' in Mark : * 1 6. Mk ii. 20 ; Lk v. 35 : c in that day ' (or ' those days '). *iy. Mk iv. 39; Lk viii. 24 : ' the wind ceased.' *i8. Mk vi. 36 ; Lk ix. 12 : 'the country round about/ LIST II. Matthezv follows Mark in retaining , while Luke omits : *i. Mk iii. 33 ; Mt xii. 48 : ' who is my mother, &c.' 2. Mk iv. i ; Mt xiii. i, 2 : 'by the sea side ... he entered into a boat and sat.' *3. Mk iv. 5 ; Mt xiii. 5 : ' where it had not much earth.' (Cf. Lk viii. 6.) 4 Mk v. 23 ; Mt ix. 18 : 'lay thy hands on her, &c.' *5. Mkv. 28; Mt ix. 21 : 'For she said, If I touch but, &c.' *6. Mk vi. 35; Mt xiv. 15: the lateness of the hour twice mentioned. *y. Mk x. 26; Mt xix. 25: 'they were astonished exceedingly (this is implied in their question). 8. Mk x. 27 ; Mt xix. 26 :' looking upon them.' Before passing on from the substance to the phraseology of Mark, two other kinds of Marcan peculiarities may be named, the omission of which seems much more probable than their subsequent insertion by an editor : i. The Aramaic 1 or Hebrew phrases 'Boanerges' iii. 17 ; 'Talitha cumi ' v. 41 ; ' Corban ' vii. u ; ' Ephphatha ' vii. 34. ' Abba ' xiv. 36 is perhaps not a case in point, as it seems to have been a ' liturgical formula ' : see Lightfoot on Gal iv. 6; also Rom viii. 15. In xv. 22 (' Golgotha ') and xv. 34 (' Eloi &c.') there are parallels in Matthew but not in Luke. 1 See Schurer's Hist, of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ, E. T., II. i. 9 f. on the 'complete prevalence of Aramaic ', though ' Hebrew still remained in use as " the sacred language ".' in 5"/. Mark's Gospel 131 2. Some unimportant Proper Names, 1 viz. Alphaeus ii. 14; Decapolis v. 20; Bartimaeus the son of Timaeus x. 46 ; Alexander and Rufus xv. 21 ; Salome xv. 40. On Boanerges see above, and on Abiathar (ii. 26) see p. 122. SECTION IV RUDE, HARSH, OBSCURE OR UNUSUAL WORDS OR EXPRES- SIONS, WHICH MAY THEREFORE HAVE BEEN OMITTED OR REPLACED BY OTHERS 2 (a) Various unusual words and constructions. i. Mk i. 10 (rx^o/jifvovs, a word used nowhere else in N. T. or LXX of the opening of the heavens. In Mt Hi. 16 and Lk iii. 21 we have the more usual and suitable rp*yx6ttrns- without an accusative. In the parallel Mt iv. 1 8 /3dAAoi/Tny u/i$i'/3X770Tpo>, to which the received text in Mark has been assimilated : cf. Hab i. 1 7 a/^t/SaAfl TO 4p$4&ifpoy nvroO. 3- Mk i. 23 ev TrvevpaTt aKaGapTw, where Luke has the 'easier phrase' (Swete) f\(i3v irvcvp.a dai/jLoviov aKciBaprov. So also in Mk v. 2, where Matthew has &u/zor/io/uei>oi and Luke has e^on/ dac/iowa. These are the only two places in which V nvfvfuiTi is used with reference to evil spirits. 1 Dr. A. Wright has discussed the Proper Names in St. Mark very fully in Some New Testament Problems, pp. 56 ff. 2 Besides E. A. Abbott in Enc. Brit., x. 802, referred to in my first edition, see Dean A. Robinson, Study of the Gospels, p. 46, especially on Mark's ' 190 short relative clauses ' ; and on his style generally, Jiilicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 324 f.; and on his Aramaisms which Matthew and Luke may have 'pruned away', J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 242 (quoting Wellhausen), and Allen in Expository Times, xiii. 328 f. ; also Maclean in Diet, of Christ and the Gospels, ii. 129 ff. 3 See Abbott's remarks, From Letter to Spirit, 642, on 'the special force about Mark ' here. K 2 132 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A 4- Mk i. 34 and xi. 16 rjQuv, an unusual and irregular form: see Winer, xiv. 3 (&). 5- Mk i. 38 Ka>po7r6\(ts : here only in N. T. and not in LXX. 6. Mk ii. 4, 9, n, 12; vi. 55 K/wzjSarro?, 1 replaced in Matthew and Luke by K\IVT) or K\ivi8iov, but also used John 4, Acts 2. 7- Mk ii. 1 6 on= 'why'; also in ix. n, 28. See pp. 13 and 35. 8. Mk ii. 2 1 2 f7ripdiTTi, a verb found nowhere else in Greek : replaced in Matthew and Luke by 9- Mk v. 23 ; vii. 25 Bvyarpiov : here only in N. T. and not in LXX. 3 10. Mk V. 23 faxnro)s e'xfi. 4 11-14. Mk vi. 27 o-7T6KouXaTO)p, a Latin word peculiar to Mark, as also is Kfvrvpiav xv. 39, 44, 45 : see also If'orij? ' sextarius ' in vii. 4 (used also in Jos. Ant. viii. 2. 9). The phrase in xv. 15, TO IKOVOV 7rotr}o-ai= ' satisfacere,' may also be added. But against these exclusively Marcan Latinisms is to be set Kovo-rooSm found only in Mt xxvii. 65, 66 ; xxviii. 1 1. See Swete's Comm., p. xliii f., against laying too great stress on the occurrence of such words. 15-17, Mk vi. 39 o-vp-noaia o-v/moo-in, and 40 7rpat> fffTrjKOTwv : an awkward arrangement of words, which Matthew and Luke avoid by placing their respective adverbs (&Se and avrov) after T>V. 20. Mk XI. 14 fJLrjKcn . . . (jir)8c\s Kapnbv (j)dyot. The USC of the optative had become rare in the Greek of N. T. times (J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 179, 197). Besides which it might here seem more like a wish for, and imprecation of, evil than the ov /u/?** e* of Mt xxi. 1 9, which has more of a future sense. 21. Mk xi. 19 orav tye eyevero. On the indicative after oraj/, see pp. 13 and 35. 22. Mk xii. 4 cKf^oXiWoy or eVcf(paAaiWai>. Of these forms the first is not found elsewhere, and the second has a different meaning. See Wright's note, St. Luke, p. 171. 23- Mk xiii. 1 1 [ii] TTpo/iept/ui/arf, a verb not found elsewhere in N. T., LXX, or Classical writers : instead of it we find M /xept/^a^re in Mt x. 19, Lk xii. 1 1, and M irpo^crav in Lk xxi. 14. 24. Mk xiii. 1 6 6 els TOV dypov. Though this is explicable (Swete in loc.] Blass, Gram., p. 122), the preposition ya$ Sapijo-fo-fle and Matthew's cv rais v in Mt xxvi. 71, and Luke has no parallel. 33- Mk xiv. 7 2 7npa\a>v i a strange and obscure word as used here. 2 Besides the very unusual words which form the greater 1 Another expression condemned by Phrynichus : see Tiber's Lex., s.v. He also condemns pa-nia^a used in verse 65 (see Abbott, Corrections of Mark, 492). 2 See Field's Notes on Transl. of N. T. in he. iv S/. Mark's Gospel 135 part of the preceding list, it will be seen in the Appendix on 'The Synoptists and the Septuagint' (p. 198) that the list of words peculiar to Mark is on the whole much less accordant with the LXX than the list of words peculiar to Matthew and Luke, the latter being the most accordant of the three. But the LXX may be taken as representing to us the standard of ordinary Hellenistic (or Koiz^rj) Greek, as applied to religious subjects. It thus appears that there was a certain unusualness in Mark's vocabulary which would render it probable a priori that those who used his memoirs would, intentionally or unconsciously or both, modify the language of them by substituting more familiar or more conventionally sacred expressions. The relative numbers of Classical and non-Classical words in the Synoptic Gospels, as shown in the same Appendix (p. 207), also point, though less decidedly, to unusualness as a characteristic of the language of Mark. () Instances of anacoluthon, or broken or incomplete construction, in Mark, which are altered or avoided in Matthew or Luke or both. These are placed together in this sub-section for comparison with one another, as being particularly characteristic of Mark. i. Mkiii. 1 6 f. eVoi^o-ei; rovs oi>8eKa (*at enedrjKfp ovopa ra> Si'/uaw) Uerpov, 2. Mk IV. 31 f. 0)9 KOKKO) ... 09 OTdV (TTTilpfj . . . fJLlKpOT(pOV OV TSOVTtoV . . . 3- Mk v. 23 Xt'ycov 6Yi . . . o-\aTs e^ft, Iva (\6&v firtOfjs. The sen- tence is altered in the Western text of Mark, as well as in Matthew and Luke. 4- Mk vi. 8 f . Iva p.r)8ev cupoxrii' . . . , dXXa i 136 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A 5- Mk xi. 32 aXXa t*rra>[JiCi> . . . e0o/3oCwro TOV o^Xoz/. 6. Mk xii. 19 MwiJffjjs fypafycv r,fuv on cav TIVCS . . . Iva 7- Mk xii. 3840 . . . T&v BfKovTtov fv oroXaty irfpuraTflv Koi a *rX., of KciTfaOovTes ras oltdas. . . . No doubt 0f\6i>ra>v might govern the noun aairao-povs (as in Lk v. 39; 2 Cor xi. 12) as well as the verb TT(pnraT(li>, but the sentence has thus a rather strange sound which Luke's insertion of t\ovvTo>v removes. But oi KareaQovTes following the genitive T>V &X. is certainly an anacoluthon, which Luke avoids by the relative pronoun and verb o? Mk Xlii. 14 /38e'Xvy/Lta TTJS fpr)na>o-a>s eon^Kora (Mt xxiv. 15 eords) : apparently a consiructio ad sensum, with which may be compared Mk ix. 20 tdo>i> avrbv TO nvevpa. (The same thought as in 2 Thes ii. 3 ff. may have been in the writer's mind.) 9- Mk xiv. 49 XX' Iva 7r\r]pa>6>ai ) where Matthew supplies the ellipsis by prefixing TOVTO de 6Xoi/ ycyow instead of uXXa. With these may be placed three other instances of imperfect con- struction, which do not amount to anacoluthon, but which also disappear in Matthew and Luke: 10. Mk iii. 8 : the repetition of irAi/do? TroXy after TroXv ir\q6os in verse 7. ii. Mk IV. 8 fly TpiaKOVTa Koi ev ef)Kovra Kai ev cKaTov : SO WH, but the reading is very doubtful. 12. Mk vii. 19 KaOaptfav Trdvra TO. /3po>/iara, wheVe the nearest verb to which the participle can be attached is Xeyet at the beginning of verse 18. iv S/. Mark's Gospel 137 13- Mk x. 29, 30 ovSei'f eo-Tti/ os d(f>fjKev . . . tav /iq Xa/Sfl, where Luke has in the second clause os oi>xi M Aa/3?/ (xviii. 30), and Matthew alters the saying to nas oo-m OX^MV . . . Xfj^erai. There are also in Mk iv. 26 ; vii. 2-5 ; xiii. 34 three broken constructions more or less characteristic of Mark, but there happen to be no parallel passages in which we can see how Matthew or Luke dealt with them (with the last of them, however, cf. Mt xxv. 14). (c) Cases of 'asyndeton', or want of connexion. As the word 'harsh' was used in the heading of this section, attention may here be called to an abruptness of construction, which may well be called harsh, in the reports pf certain sayings in Mark, as contrasted with the reports in Matthew and Luke. This arises from his use of ' asyn- deton ', i. e. from the absence of conjunctions or other con- necting words. An examination of the chief instances l of this difference will, I think, make it appear highly probable that the smoother and more connected forms of the sentences in Matthew and Luke were altered from the more rough and crude forms in Mark, and not vice versa. Compare Mk i. 27 with Lk iv. 36 6Vt ; Mk ii. 21 with Mt ix. 16 8c, and cf. also Lk v. 36 ; Mk iii. 35 with Mt xii. 50 ydp ; Mk v. 39 with Mt ix. 24 and Lk viii. 52 yap; Mk viii. 15 with Mt xvi. 6 *ai; Mk x. 14 with Mt xix. 14 and Lk xviii. 16 /cat; Mk x. 25 with Lk xviii. 25' yap, and cf. also Mt xix. 24; Mk xii. 9 with Mt xxi. 40 and Lk xx. i$b ovv ; Mk xii, 17 with Mt xxii. 21 ovv and Lk xx. 25 roivvv ; Mk xii. 20 with Mt xxii. 25 8e and Lk xx. 29 ovv, Mk xii. 23 with Mt xxii. 28 and Lk xx. 33 ovv ; Mk xii. 27 with Lk xx. 38 8e 2 ; Mk xii. 36 with Lk xx. 42 yap ; Mk xii 37 with Mt xxii. 45 and Lk xx. 44 ovv ; Mk xiii. 6 with Mt xxiv. 5 and Lk xxi. 8 yap ; Mk xiii. 7 1 I owed some of them to Mr. (now Archdeacon) Allen. 2 Here Matthew agrees with Mark, so the contrast is only with Luke. 138 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A with Mt xxiv. 6 and Lk xxi. 9 yap ; Mk xiii. 8 b with Mt xxiv. 7 Ktti, KCU and Lk xxi. n re, /cat, /cat ; Mk xiii 8 c l with Mt xxiv. 8 8e; Mk xiii. 9 with Mt x. 17 yap ; Mk xiii. 34 with Mt xxv. 14 yap ; Mk xiv. 6 with Mt xxvi. 10 yap; Mk xvi. 6 with Mt xxviii. 6 yap [and Lk xxiv. 6 aAAa]. 2 Mk xiv. 8 and 41 are perhaps also worth considering with their parallels ; and Mk iv. 28 and xiii. 33, to which there are no parallels, but which illustrate this feature of the Marcan style. Only those cases of asyndeton which occur in the sayings of Jesus or of others have been referred to. For although Mark has several similar cases in his narrative (see viii. 19, 29^ ; ix. 24, 38 ; x. 27, 28, 29 ; xii. 24, 29, 32 (?) ; xiv. $b, 19), they cannot be treated as characteristic of him, since they are largely outnumbered by the cases in which Matthew, by a usage almost confined to himself and the Fourth Evangelist, begins a sentence of his narrative with the historic present Ae'yei or \tyovcnv, and without the employ- ment of any conjunction (see Mt viii. 7 ; ix. 28 b\ xiii. 51 ; xvi. 15 ; xvii. 25 ; xviii. 22 ; xix. 7, 8, 10, 18, 20 ; xx. 21, 22 , 23, 33 ; xxi. 31 bis, 41, 42; xxii. 21, 42, 43; xxvi - 35, 64 ; xxvii. 22 bis ; also, in a parable, xx. 7 bis)? But numerous though these instances of asyndeton in narrative are, they do not convey the impression of abruptness which is given by Mark in discourses. In Luke the decidedly asyndetic constructions are very few; see, however, xiv. 27; xvii. 32, 33; xxi. 13 in dis- courses ; vii. 42 ; xix. 22 in parables ; vii. 43 in the narrative. 1 Tisch places in verse 9 the words ap\r) wSivcuv ravra which are here referred to. 2 Against these is to be set Mt xx. 26 without a conjunction, while Mk x 43 and Lk xxii. 26 have St. 3 Similarly 4'7 is used without a conjunction in Mt iv. 7; xix. 21 (WH ; xxvi. 34 ; xxvii. 65 (?) ; also in a parable xxv. 21, 23. S/. Mark's Gospel SECTION V DUPLICATE EXPRESSIONS IN MARK, OF WHICH ONE OR BOTH OF THE OTHER SYNOPTISTS USE ONE PART, OR ITS EQUIVALENT MARK. 32 o\ 6 fj\tos i. 42 (iirr)\6cv mr' ai/rov rj XeVpa Kai e/ca^e- picrdr) *ii. 2O rore vrjcrrevcrov- Xe-yiioi/a V. 19 fts rov otKoi/ V. 19 oo-a o Kvptos (roi TreTToirjKfv Kai r]\tr)(Tov(nv x. 3 ii. 26 TTCO? OUV (TTa0Tj- T) j3p.as ix. 12 fty TO? KVK\(O KO>- dypovs Kal K6vs flffiropevo- xxi. 2 et-^uff xix. 30 elo-TTopevouevot (JLCVOl xii. 14 f^(o~Ttv dovvai xxii. 17 fco~Tiv dovvai XX. 22 ej~TTi.v fads Kai- Krjvo~ov Kaiaapi ?; oi/y Krjvffov KaiVapi ^ ovy o-api 6pov dovvai fj Sw/tev 17 /i^ d&uevj' * ov; xii. 44 TrdWa oo-a flx (v [Wanting here] xxi. 4 Trdvra TOV ftiov ov . . . oXoy TOV ftiov fo> txiii. 28 aTraXos- ycvrjToi xxiv. 32 yevrjrai dnaXbs xxi. 30 7rpo/3aXa>o-M' Kal K(pvr} Ta (pv\\a Kal TO. (pv\\a K(pvr] txiii. 29 eyyvs eo~Tiv Vt xxiv. 33 eyyvs C'O-TIV eVi xxi. 31 fyyvs eo~Tiv ftpaw Ovpais *xiv. I TO Ilao-^a Kal TO xxvi. 2 TO nuo"^a xxii. I T) eopTi) T&V at>- u.(av ft \eyou.(vr) Uda va 1 See also the preceding verse. 2 If with Tisch we were to retain in Mk xii. 23 orav dvaffrwffiv after \v TJ7 dvacrrdaei, it would supply the next case : but see WH, Notes, p. 26. 3 D a omit /col rd a^v^a : see Allen on Mt xxvi. 2. v . Mark's Gospel 141 MARK. MATTHEW. LUKE. XIV. 6 acpere ai'Trjv' TI XXVi. IO Tl K07TOVS TTdpe- [Luke wanting. But avrfj KOTTOVS Trapeze/ XCTC TTJ yvvaiKi; cf. Jn xii. 7 a(pfs avTrjv] xiv. 1 5 effTpwfj.evov eroi- [Wanting here] xxii. 12 cVTpo)/ueVoi/ /zov xiv. 30 o-rjfJLepov TavTTj rfj xxvi. 34 fv ravTi] TTJ xxii. 34 o~Tjfj.epov VVKTL VVKTl xiv. 43 ' *v@vs f TI avrov xxvi. 47 CTI avTov \a- xxii. 47 6Tt avToO Xa- \a\ovvTos \OVVTOS XoGfTOP xiv. 6 1 eVia>7ra Kai OVK xxvi. 63 eVia)7ra [Wanting here] d.Tr(KpivaTo ovdev xiv. 68 OI/TC oida oCVe xxvi. 70 ou/c oida TI X'- xxii. 57 owe oida auToV xv. 21 jrapayovra . . . ... . xxiii. 26 fpxopevov OTT' fp)(6fjLvov an* dypov aypoO ? xvi. 2 Xiai> Trpwi . . . xxviii. I rji nt(pa)- xxiv. I opdpov (3aQ(a>s dvardXavTOs TOV nAiov a-Kovo-ri fi? ... * In these cases Luke also has two phrases, so the contrast is only between Mark and Matthew. t In these cases Matthew also has two phrases, so the contrast is only between Mark and Luke. The following places, with their parallels, are also worth notice, though in these cases it may be said that something is added by each part of Mark's duplicate expression, so that one part does not merely repeat the other: Mk i. 15 ; iii. 5, 29 ; vi. 30 ; viii. u ; ix. 12, 35 ; x. 16, 46 ; xiv. 7, 44 ; xv. 32, 42. And the following passages supply some other instances of Mark's pleonastic way of writing 2 : Mk i. 28, 35, 38, 45 ; iv. 2, 8 ; v. 5, 26 ; vi. 25 ; vii. 33 ; viii. 28 ; xv. 26. 3 It may perhaps be mentioned as a sign of Mark's 1 Perhaps, however, the iSov in Matthew and Mark may be taken as an equivalent to (vOvs, which (or eufoW) is the LXX rendering of .r r in three out of the five cases in which the Hebrew can be compared. a It is only meant that this pleonastic way of writing is especially and predominantly Marcan, not that it is exclusively so : see Lk v. 26; ix. 45 ; xi. 36 ; xviii. 34 ; and especially viii. 25, where Luke has the duplicate ex- pression as compared with Mk iv. 41 ; Mt viii. 27. 3 'EK iraiSioOfv (Mk ix. 21 only) and drro natcpoOev (p. 12) may be here noted as grammatically pleonastic expressions. 142 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A fondness for 'duality' that he uses the double negative much more frequently than the other Synoptists, the numbers in the historical books being Mt 3, Mk 17, Lk 8, Acts 5, Jn 17. But no great stress can be laid on the use of a construction so common in Greek generally. (For ovKfTi with another negative, see above, p. 13.) Perhaps too Mark's fondness for the use of a compound verb followed by the same preposition * may come under this heading. This section has an important bearing on a point which was much discussed before the priority of Mark to Matthew and Luke had obtained its present general acceptance. It used to be thought that in such passages as i. 32, 42 ; xiv. 30 (see above) Mark had put together phrases from Matthew and Luke. But after looking through all these instances of Mark's habitual manner of duplicate expression, it will appear far more probable 2 that he had here used two phrases in his customary way, and that in these cases Matthew happened to adopt one of them and Luke the other, whereas in some other cases, e.g. Mk ii. 25 ; xiv. 43 (see above), they both happened to adopt the same one. 3 1 For instances of this see Allen's Sf. Matthew, pp. xxv f. 2 So Plummer, Intern. Crit. Comm. on Lk iv. 40, agreeing with E. A. Abbott. 3 How natural and obvious a course it would be for any writer to choose one or other of Mark's similar phrases, instead of retaining both of them, is illustrated by an interesting fact to which Prof. K. Lake called my attention, when the above list of parallels was first published. It appears that in at least six of the places there referred to the Sinaitic-Syriac text of Mark gives only one part of his duplicate expression, viz. in Mk i. 32, 42; vi. 36 ; vii. 21 ; x. 30 ; xiv. 43. See also xii. 14 (in xii. 44 the Syr sin text seems to be imperfect). Cf. Lake's Text of the N. T., p. 38. vi S/. Mark's Gospel 143 SECTION VI THE HISTORIC PRESENT IN MARK It will be seen in the following lists that the 'historic present' is very frequent in Mark's narrative, compara- tively rare in Matthew's, and extremely rare in Luke's. This usage accounts for the numerous occurrences in Mark of Xey ct instead of a7rei> (since enreuj has no present in use), which constitute a large proportion of the cases in which Matthew and Luke agree against Mark. 1 Now if (as we see was probably the case in other matters) Matthew and Luke made this change of phraseo- logy from Mark, they were only preferring a more usual to a less usual mode of expression. For it appears from the LXX that the employment of the historic present had been up to this time by no means common with the writers of sacred story in the Koivij or Hellenistic Greek ; if, for instance, we take the verbs which Mark most frequently uses in this way, viz. Ae'yet, Aeyouo-i^, and epxcrai, ep\ovrai t it will be found that they are thus used in this one short Gospel considerably more often than in the whole of the historical books of the Old Testament. And, if we take all verbs into account, we find that Mark is nearly approached in this usage by only one of the various translators whose hands can be traced in the LXX namely the renderer of i Kingdoms (=i Samuel) into Greek. 2 In John the historic present is found 162 times (besides two cases preserved by Tisch in xi. 29). But when we remember the respective lengths of the two Gospels (Mark occupying about 41 and John about 53 pages in WH's Greek Test.), it appears that Mark uses it more freely than John. This however would be mainly accounted for by his propor- 1 See Appendix B to Part III, p. 208. 2 On the use of the Historic Present in LXX, see Additional Note, p. 213. 144 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A tion of narrative to discourse being so much higher than John's : there are comparatively few cases in Jn v-x and xiv-xvii, and none at all in chapters ix, x, xv, xvii. 1 The usage is frequent in Josephus. And Dr. J. H. Moulton says that it is common in the papyri. 2 In several cases the historic present gives to this Gospel something of the vividness produced in the parallel places of Matthew and Luke by the use of i8ov, which is never employed by Mark (or by John) in narrative ', but by Matthew 33 times and by Luke 16 times. List of 151 Historic Presents in MARK. Mark. \. 12 ciejSaXXct 21 30 37 38 Parallel word (if any} in Matthew. Parallel word (if any) in Luke. I avfatirj iv. I J/yero ... 31 xar^X^ei ... 38 TjptoTrjcra T 43 ftTrev . 2 (OU . . . 7TpO(reA- V. 12 eytvero 6a>v I8ov 3 Xeyo>i> 13 Xe'ycoj/ 4 Xe'yfi* 14 Trap^yyti 2 i8oi> 7rpo 22 ftjTfV 6 Xf'yfi* 24 ?!/ 9 Xe'yei* 27 flTTfV IO e'yeVfro ... 12 flTrei/ 31 e?7Tfi/ 14 7rpoyj7 [47 &,] 2O aTrrjyyeXf/ 33 Xe'yei 48 eiTrei/ ... 34 Xe'yei 49 eiTrej/ T 21 flTTtV iv. I 0-urayerac xiii. 2 (ruvt)\0r)(rav 4 o-wioVroy 13 Xe'yei ... ... 35 ^*y et Viii. I 8 Kf\CV(TfV 22 eiTrev 37 yiVerai 24 e'yeVero 23 Kare^rj 38 fycipovo~iv 25 fjycipav 24 ftifjyc'pav \cyovo-iv ,, Xe'yoj/rey ,, Xe'yowes V. 7 Kpdt-as . . . Xe'yei 29 eVpa^af Xc'yov- 28 dvaKpdas . . . rey f 9 Xeyei ... 30 crircv 15 epxovrai 34 e'??X0ej/ 35 ^X0ai 19 Xe'yei .'.'.' 38 Xeycoj/ 22 epx^rai . . . Kai ix. 1 8 iSov . . . 7rpov 41 idoi) ?i\6fv ,, Trarrei rrpoffeKvvfi iTftratv 23 TrapaKaXeZ ... TrnpfKaXei 35 epxovTai 49 epx Tal ^ 36 Xe'yei 50 aTTfKpiQr) 38 epyofTdi 23 e'X^coi/ 51 e'X^i/ ,, peopet t'dcoj/ ... 39 Xe'yei eXey'V 52 e&rey 4 07rapaX / z/3am ... 5 1 OUK d . . . eiaTropeverru 25 eicreX$coi> ,.r* 41 Xe'yei ... 54 ($a)vr)(rfV Xe'ytor vi. I ep^erai xiii. 54 e'X^eoi/ ? iv. 1 6 ^X^ev ,, duoXovdoi (riv ... ... 7 Trpoo-KaXelrni x. I Trpoff/caXetra- ix. I auwcaXeo-d/Liei o? 30 o-vvdyovrai IO VTToa-TptyavTfS 31 Xe'yei ... ... 37 Xeyoucrti' xiv. 1 7 Xe'yov * 13 eiVai/ 38 Xe'yei ... ... HAWKINS L 146 Statistics and Observations PUIII.A Parallel word (if any) Parallel word (if any) Mark. in Matthew. in Luke. vi. 38 \eyovo~iv ... 45 aTroXvei (?) xiv. 22 diroXvo-fl 48 epxerai 25 rj\6ev VO 50 Xe'yei 27 eXaX^crev . . . Xeycov ... . vii. I crvvayovrai XV. I 7TpO(Tep^OI/Tat* 'I 5 eVepwTwo-iv \cyovTfS i 1 8 Xe'yei l6 eirrei/ ..- 28 Xe'yei 27 ei7rei> ^ 32 (pepovo-iv ? 30 TrpoatjKQov ... s e^oj/rey ,. o irapiiKaXovo-iv ... 34 Xe'yei ... I viii. I Xeyei 32er7rey 1 6 yrapnyye'XXei 35 Trapayysi'Xas 12 Xe'yei xvi. 2 eiTrei/ 17 Xe'yei 8 eltrev bfl 19 Xeyoi>(rii> ... en 2O Xeyouo-ii> ... | 22 epxovrai ... ... ^ ,, (pepov&iv ... ^ TrapaKaXouo-ii/ ... 29 Xe'yei l6 ei?rej/ ix. 2O elirev 5. 33 Xe'yei 23 eiTrep ix. 2 TrapaXapfidvd xvii. I TrapaXa/AjSarei * 28 7rapaXa/3a>p ai/a\6ov . . xxi. 2O 21 Xe'yovres 1 xxvi. 1 7 7rpo(rri\dov . . . xxii. XeyovTfs 5 Xeyowcoi; 9 finav 13 aTTOOTe'XXei . . . 8 aTreVreiXj Xe'yei 1 8 eiW IO ewrej; 17 epxerai 2O az/e'^eiTO 14 dvTT? 34 e?7T/ 32 epxovrai 36 ep^erai * 40 yevd/iei'oy ,, Xe'yfi Xeyei * eiVey 33 7rapaXjuai/ei 37 TrapaXajScov ... 34 Xeyei 38 Xe'yei * ... 37 epxerai 40 fpxcrai * 45 eX^wi/ cvpio-Kei Vpi(TK(l * t" Xe'yei Xe'yei* 46 eiVf 41 ep^erai 45 e'pxerai * ... Xe'yei Xe'yei * ... 43 Trapayivcrai 47 Wow . . . i fX- 47 i8ow . . 0V yiaev 45 Xe'yei 49 ewrei/ ... 51 Kparovo-iv ... ... 53 a-vvepxovTai 57 O'vvr)x@ 1 l (j ' av ... 6 1 Xe'yei 63 fiTrev 66 \eyovTfs 63 Xe'yei 65 Xeycoi/ 71 eiVai; 66 ep^erai 69 7rpoa-fi\0fv ... 67 Xe'yei Xeyou(ra 56 17T(V XV. 2 Xe'yei xxvii. II e^iy xxiii. 3 e^)?; 1 6 o-uj/KaXoCoii/ 27 avi/^yayov ... L 2 148 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A Mark. xv. 1 7 fvdidvi/ 26 dirfjyayov 33 34 32 XVI. 2 epxovrai XXVlll. I f)\vtt> XXIV. I 4 0fa>pov 5 clirav * In these 21 cases only does Matthew agree with Mark in using the historic present (no less than 9 of them occur in Mk xiv. 27-41 ; Mt xxvi. 31-45). t This is the only case in which Luke agrees with Mark in using the historic present. Mark does not ever use the historic present in Parables. List of 78 Historic Presents in MATTHEW. 1 ii. 13 (pmVerai (?) ix. 6 Xt'yei* xvii. I d/>a$e'pei* 19 (paiVerai 9 Xe'yei* 2O Xeyei iii. I yrapayiVerot 14 Trpoo-epxovTai* 25 Xe'yei 13 Trapayiverai 28 Xe'yei xviii. 22 Xe'yei 15 d(pirja'LV Xe'yoixru/ xix. 7 Xeyovo-iy iv. 5 7rapaXup./3at/ei 37 Xe'yei 8 Xe'yei 6 Xeyei xii. 13 Xe'yei* IO Xeyoucrti/ 8 7rapaXap./3ai/ei xiii. 51 Xe'yovtriy 1 8 Xeyei (? (prjcriv) ,, deiKMO-iv xiv. 8 (prjffiv 2O Xeyei 1 Xe'yei 1 7 Xe'yovo'ii' * XX. 21 Xe'yei (?) 1 1 d(pirj(TiV 31 Xe'yei 22 Xe'you0-ii> ig Xe'yei XV. I TTpoo-epxovTtn* 23 Xe'yei viii. 4 Xe'yei* 12 \eyovffiv 33 \eyovo-tv 7 Xeyei 33 Xeyovffiv xxi. 13 Xe'yei 2O Xe'yei 34 Xe'yei 1 6 Xeyei 22 Xeyet xvi. 15 Xe'yei 19 Xeyei 26 Xe'yei XVli. I TrapaXo/i/Safei * 31 Xe'you(Tii/ 1 It is noticeable that in Matthew the words which signifyspeaking^e'-yet, \fyovffiv, (prjaiv) constitute slightly more than three-fourths of the whole number, being 59 out of the 78 ; while in Mark they constitute less than half, being 72 out of the 151. VI S/. Mark's Gospel 149 xxvi. 5 2 Xeyei 64 Xeyei 71 Xe'yet xxvii. 13 Xe'yei 22 Xe'yei ,, Xe'yovtrtv 38 a-ravpovvrai * xxviii. 10 Xeyei * These are the 21 cases in which Matthew agrees with Mark in using the historic present. Matthew also uses the following 1 5 presents in Parables : xxi. 3* Xe'yei xxvi. 31 Xe'yei * 4i XeyouTiv 35 Xe'yei 42 Xeyei 36 epxe 7 ni * xxii. 16 a7roo-r;XXov- Xe'yei * aw* 38 Xeyei * 20 Xeyei * 40 epx at * 21 XeyovoHi/ CVpi(TKft * \ X N. / * 91 Aeyei > Ac j/cl 42 Xeyouo'ii' 45 epx*i -at * 43 Xe'yei Xe'yei * xiii. 28 Xe'yovo-iy 29 viii. 49 epxfroi t xi. 37 epcora xi. 45 Xeyei Besides the above 4 cases, there are only the following 2, which are in passages double-bracketed by WH and omitted by Tisch : xxiv. 12 /SXeVfi (as in Jn xx. 5) xxiv. 36 Xe'yei l (as in Jn xx. 19) t Agreeing with the epx ov * n Mk v. 35. Luke also uses the following 5 presents in Parables : xiii. 8 Xeyei xvi. 7 Xeyet xvi. 23 opa xvi. 29 Xtyet xix. 22 Xe'yet It may be added that in Acts there are 13 Historic Presents : viii. 36 (prjaiv xxii. 2 x. II Gtcopel xxiii. 1 8 27 eupiovcet xxv. 5 31 ^ai' * 22 24 xxvi. 24 xii. 8 \eyft xix. 35 (prjaiv xxi. 37 Xe'yet 1 Except in this one very doubtful case, Luke never uses \eyei of Jesus (Abbott, in Enc. Bibl, ii. 1766). 2 In the recital by Cornelius. 150 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A SECTION VII THE CONJUNCTION Kat PREFERRED TO M IN MARK The two most constantly recurring causes of the agree- ment of Matthew and Luke against Mark are two preferences of Mark, viz. (i) for Xiyeiv instead of etTreir, as referred to in the last section, and (ii) for Kat instead of de. The latter preference requires a few words of notice in any close examination of the Marcan peculiarities, though the difference in meaning between the two conjunctions is practically so slight ; for, as Winer points out, 1 ' Ac is often used when the writer merely subjoins something new, different, and distinct from what precedes, but on that account not sharply opposed to it. ... Hence in the Synoptic Gospels Kat and 8e are sometimes parallel.' Now there are at least 26 cases in which both Matthew and Luke have 8e where Mark has Kat: see Mk iii. 4, 32 ; iv. n, 18, 20, 35 ; v. 13, 14 ; vi. 35, 37 b ; viii. 28 b t 36 ; ix. 30 ; x. 23 ; xi. 4, 8, 9, 18, 31 ; xii. 35 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 12, 53, 54; xv. 15 b ; xvi. i, and parallels. Such cases must of course be counted in by those who are enumerating the points of agreement between Matthew and Luke against Mark. But it seems to me that they carry hardly any weight as signs either (a) that the Petrine source which Matthew and Luke used was different in language from our Gospel of Mark, or (b) that either Matthew or Luke must have seen the other's Gospel. 2 For it is to be observed, first, that Mark's preference for Kat rather than 6^ is a characteristic of his style throughout his Gospel. 3 Two proofs of this may be given : 1 liii. 7 b. 2 See Abbott, Corrections of Mark, 536 ff. ; and Enc. Brit. , x. 807 a. * Chapter xiii is an exception ; and, speaking generally, 8( is less rare in the later than in the earlier chapters. vn St. Mark's Gospel 151 1. He uses 8e less than half as freely as the other Synoptists do. For 8^ is found in Mark only about 156 times, 1 whereas it would be found quite 300 times if its use was as general as it is in Matthew and Luke, where it is employed about 496 and 508 times respectively (those Gospels being longer than Mark by more than one-third). 2. If we take the sections and sub-sections of Mark, as denoted in WH by fresh paragraphs and by spaces respectively, they amount together to 88. Of these no less than 80 begin with KCU, and of the others only 6 have 8e as the second word. But in Matthew out of 159 such divisions only 38 begin with KCU, while 54 have 8e as the second word ; and in Luke out of the 145 divisions only 53 begin with KCU, while 83 have 8e as the second word (including 8e Kat 4 times). Therefore, in the above-mentioned places where Matthew and Luke agree against Mark, the three were only adhering to their habitual preference. And, secondly, it is worth notice that we see in the LXX that different writers (in this case, different translators) had their personal proclivities in this little matter, though KCU largely preponderates on the whole as the rendering of the Hebrew copula. 2 If we take as specimens a few chapters from the historical books, we find 8e used toler- ably often in Gen iv, xviii, xix ; Ex iii-vi, whereas it is very nearly absent from Judg xiii-xiv ; 3 Ki xvi-xxii ; Neh i-ii (=2 Esdr xi, xii). 3 If, then, other Hellenistic 1 For these numbers I have had to rely on Bruder, with some corrections of my own : Moulton and Geden do not give Se or /rat. On John see Abbott, Joh. Gram., 2133^ 2 It is curious that, as to this one small point only, Mark should be nearer to LXX usage than Matthew or Luke. See Appendix A to Part III, 'The Synoptists and the Septuagint ' (p. 198). 3 In these eleven chapters there are but five instances of 5e, viz. 3 Ki xvii. 13 ; xx. 2, 6 ; xxi. 23, 39. In Jonah there are but four instances, viz. i. 5; ii. 10 (in the Psalm) ; iii. 3 ; iv. n. 152 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A writers thus varied in their use of these conjunctions, we need not look for anything suggestive or significant in the fact that Matthew and Luke happened to have one habit, and Mark another habit in this same matter, and that consequently two of them often agree against the third when we can compare them in the triple narrative. On the whole it seems to me that such an examination of the Marcan peculiarities as has now been attempted supplies results which are largely in favour of the view that the Petrine source used by the two later Synoptists was not an ' Ur-Marcus ', but St. Mark's Gospel almost as we have it now. Almost ; but not quite. For instance, a later editor's hand is very probably to be seen in i. I ('Jesus Christ l ') ; ix. 41 (' Christ's 2 ') ; probably also in the inser- tion of ' the gospel 3 ' and ' persecutions ' in viii. 35 and x. 29, 30 ; perhaps also in the reference to ' the Jews ' in vii. 34 ; 4 and again in the numerals 200 and 300 (vi. 37 ; xiv. 5), both of which are also found in the Johannine tradition 5 (vi. 7 ; xii. 5) ; and possibly in a few other cases of additional matter, such as the ' 2000 ' in v. 13, and the disagreement of the witnesses in xiv. 56, 59. For these last four are interesting and definite particulars 1 For the only other occurrences of 'Jesus Christ ' in the Gospels are Mt. i. i, 18 (?) ; xvi. 21 (?) ; Jn i. 17 ; xvii. 3 : it (or ' Christ Jesus') is found 15 times in Acts and very frequently in the Epistles. 2 For ' Christ ' as a name is found without the article here only in the four Gospels and Acts (Lk xxiii. 2 not being a case in point) : with the article Mt i. 17 ; xi. 2 xxiii. 10 ; Acts ii. 31 and viii. 5 : and in the Epistles fre- quently both without and with the article. In this verse too Mark's vSaros may perhaps seem less original than Matthew's more unusual faxpov (x. 42). 3 fvayytkiov, however, is a word generally characteristic of Mark (p. 10). * For, excluding the phrase ' King of the Jews ', this title is used in the plural only 4 times in the Synoptic Gospels (here ; Mt xxviii. 15 ; Lk vii 3 ; xxiii. 51) ; but in John 63 times (excluding iii, 25 but including iv. 96), and in Acts 70 times. 5 But on the relations between this and Mark compare Abbott, Joh. Voc. t 1731 ff. vn S/. Mark's Gospel 153 such as, on the one hand, it seems extremely improbable that both Matthew and Luke would have thought fit to leave out, and such as, on the other hand, a subsequent editor, or scribe, or owner of a Gospel 1 would wish to add, if they had happened to come to his knowledge. 2 1 See Sanday, Inspiration, pp. 295, 297, 0:1 the 'freedom' which seems to have been used ' in propagating the text of the Gospels ' : also Blass, Philology' of the Gospels, pp. 77 ff. ; A. Robinson, Study of Gospels, p. 24. 2 On the agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark, where they seem to be using the Marcan document as a Grundschrift, see below, Appendix B to Part III. On possible compilation in the Second Gospel see above, p. 116. B. ON THE GOSPEL OF ST. MATTHEW. IN the following sections will be collected some phe- nomena of this Gospel, bearing upon the method and purpose of its composition. The word composition is an appropriate one, for in turning from Mark to Matthew we have passed from the simplest of our Gospels to that in which there are the clearest signs of compilation and of artificial arrangement (see especially Sections III, IV). 1 SECTION I THE QUOTATIONS FROM THE OLD TESTAMENT It has often been noticed 2 that the quotations which are introduced by the Evangelist himself agree much less closely with the LXX than those which occur in the course of the common narrative. The following tables will show to what a remarkable extent this is the case : CLASS I. Quotations avowedly introduced by the Author or Editor of the Gospel? Words Words Words Words in not in in not in No. LXX. LXX. No. LXX. LXX. I. Mt i. 23 . 13 2 7- Mt xii. 18-21 . 20 31 2. ii. 15 . 2 4 8. xiii. 35 - 6 4 3- 18 . 14 6 9- xxi. 5 a - 10 7 4- 23 - . ... 10. xxvii. 9, 10. 4 21 5- iv. 15, 16 20 13 6. viii. 17 . 2 7 100 95 a Also quoted in Jn xii. 15. 1 On some contradictions apparently resulting from such compilation see Julicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 312 f., 316. 2 e. g. by Bp. Westcott, Introd. to Study of Gospels, p. 229 (8th ed., 1895). See Swete, Introd. to O. T. in Greek, pp. 392 ff. ; Burkitt, Gospel History, &c., pp. 124 ff. 3 On the difference in character between these quotations and those ascribed to Jesus Himself see the striking remarks of Burkitt, op. '/., pp. 202 f. pt. in. B. i S/. Matthew's Gospel CLASS II. One quotation recorded as spoken by the Scribes in the Introductory Chapters I and II. Mt ii. 6 contains 8 words that are in LXX, and 16 that are not in LXX. CLASS III. Quotations recorded as spoken in the part of the Sermon on the Mount pecidiar to Matthew. No. I. 2. 3- 4- Mt V. 21 27 31 33 Words Words in not in LXX. LXX. No. 2 ... 5- Mt v. 38 2 ... 6. 43 3 6 2 (? ) 7 Words in LXX. 6 4 Words not in LXX. I 5 19 The prefixed fppfdrj seems to mark these passages as intended to be quotations, so they are placed here for consideration. In v. 43 the words KKai> air metr olvov /acra xoAijs fze/xiyjueVoi>, where Mk xv. 23 has fa-fjLvpvia-fjifvov : cf. Ps Ixviii. (Ixix.) 22 edo>Kaz> . . . \o\i]v. z 2. Mt xxvii. 43, where several words from Ps xxi. (xxii.) 9 are attributed to the mocking chief priests, &c. 3. Mt xxvii. 57 is the only place in which the word TrXowto?, used in Is liii. 9 in connexion with rar; and Oavaros, is applied to Joseph of Arimathaea. SECTION II THE SHORTENING OF NARRATIVES IN MATTHEW There is in this Gospel an observable tendency to shorten the common narrative, especially by condensation or omission in those parts of it which do not lead up to, or directly bear upon, sayings of Jesus. This characteristic of Matthew may in many cases be measured and appre- ciated by the simple means of noticing the amounts of space which the three narratives occupy in the parallel 1 Cf. Bp. Gore, Dissertations on Subjects connected with the Incarnation, p. 32, where he admits that the above two details and the l gall ' in Mt xxvii. 34 ' may be modifications due to the influence of the language of Zechariah and the Psalmist respectively. But in all these cases the historical event stands substantially the same when the modification is removed. 1 See also Swete on Mk xi. 2 and 7 to the same effect. And we may compare Justin's further addition (Apol. I. xxxii) that the colt was ' bound to a vine ', as in Gen xlix. n. 2 Similarly the frfjpovv avrov of xxvii. 36 may have been suggested by Ps xxi. (xxii.) 1 8 fcarevorjffav KO.I fireiSov fie : the words are not identical, but both are in close connexion with the division of the garments. ii 5/. Matthew's Gospel 159 columns of Tischendorfs Synopsis Evangelica, or some other Harmony. But it may be worth while to give here the numbers of the words employed in some of those passages : in Number of words Tisch in Syn. Ev. Mt Mt Mk Lk 35. viii. 1-4 The leper healed ... 61 97 98 36. ix. 1-8 The paralytic healed . . 126 196 212 51. viii. 18, 23-7 The first storm on the lake . 86- 122 93 52. 28-34 The Gadarene demoniac(s) . 136 325 293 53. ix. 18-26 The issue of blood healed, and Jairus' daughter raised . 135 374 289 59. xiv. 13-21 The feeding of the 5,000 . . 157 235 163 72. xvii. 14-21 The lunatic boy cured x . . 132 270 125 1 1 8. xx. 29-34 The blind men (or man) at Jericho ..... 77 123 107 144. xxvi. 17-19 The preparation for the Passover 61 98 96 Total . . 971 1840 1476 In 51 the difference is not great ; and in 59 and 72, Matthew and Luke are nearly equal, Luke being slightly the shortest in 72, while Mark is much longer than either of them. Of course there are other cases in which the narratives are substantially identical in length, and there is one case, viz. 48, the mother and brethren desiring to see Jesus, in which Luke is the shortest. 2 But, on the whole, the figures given above seem to me amply sufficient to establish the existence of this Matthaean habit in places where we can compare the three narratives. And if that is granted, it gives likelihood to the alternative that, where Matthew has a shorter narrative than either Mark or Luke 1 Though the four verses of dialogue Mk ix. 21-4 are omitted by Matthew, he has a reference to verse 22 in his verse 15 which shows that they were not unknown to him, but were purposely left unused. 2 This is the case even when Mt xii. 47, which Tisch brackets and WH place in their margin, is excluded. Perhaps Luke's brevity here may be connected with the fact that he alone records the similar incident in xi. 27, 28 (Tisch 91 c). Luke is also briefest at the commencement of 124, the expulsion of traffickers from the Temple. But, as a general rule, Matthew's preference is for compression, Luke's for omission (A. Robin- son, op. '/., p. 34). 160 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B (in the absence of a third parallel), it was he who abbre- viated, and not either of them who expanded, the matter contained in their source. Most of such cases are of course parallels with Mark, since the parallels between Matthew and Luke only are mainly in discourses and very rarely in narratives. The following are instances of both kinds : M Number of Tisch words in Syn. Et;. Mt Mk Mt Mk 25 A. xiv. 3-5 ; vi. 17-20 . . The Baptist imprisoned 1 40 76 54- xiii. 54-8 ; 1-6 . . The rejection at Nazareth 96 123 57- xiv. 6-12 ; 21-9 . The Baptist beheaded . 95 171 61. 34- 6 ; 53-6 . . Healings at Gennesaret . 44 72 123, 125. | xxi. 18-20 ; xi. 12-14, 2 > 21 The barren fig- tree . 54 77 Total . . 329 5192 in Number of Tisch words in Syn. Ev. Mt Lk Mt Lk 42. viii. 5-10, 13 3 ; vii. ib-io . The centurion's servant . 123 175 44. xi. 2-6 ; 18-23 . The Baptist's message . 63 103 Total . . 186 278 The above statistics are significant, both (i) in illus- tration of the general tendency of Matthew and Luke (and especially Matthew) to omit or condense Mark's subsidiary and pleonastic details, which has been already suggested (pp. 125 ff.), and also (ii) in connexion with the signs of adaptation for catechetical purposes in Matthew, which will be referred to further on (p. 163).* 1 Lk iii. 19, 20 is not cited here because, though similar in substance, it is placed in a different part of the narrative. 2 Mt xv. 21-8 ; Mk vii. 24-30, the story of the Syrophenician, may be mentioned as constituting an unusual case ; for while there is a good deal of matter peculiar to each narrative, the length of them is not far from the same (Mt 139 words, Mk 130). 3 Mt viii. n, 12 is not included here, because Luke gives it substantially elsewhere, and apparently in its original place (xiii. 28, 29). If its 43 words were included, Luke's narrative would still be slightly the longer. 4 See Additional Note, p. 214. m S/. Matthew's Gospel 161 SECTION III SIGNS OF COMPILATION IN MATTHEW It has been already noticed (p. no) that, in recording sayings of Jesus, Matthew and Luke seem often to draw materials from the same source, but that in more than two-thirds of such cases they arrange the materials differ- ently. We have now to notice further that this difference of arrangement is very frequently caused by Matthew placing the sayings together in large blocks of discourse, while Luke records them separately, and in many cases gives the questions or circumstances which led up to them. The following are conspicuous instances of this divergence : 1. Mt vi. 9-13 compared with Lk xi. 1-4 The Lord's Prayer. 2. 19-21 ,, xii. 33, 34 The treasure and the heart. 3. 24 ,, ,, xvi. 13 God and mammon. 4- 25-33 ,, ,, xii. 22-31 Against anxiety. 5. vii. 7-11 ,, xi. 9-13 Ask and it shall be given, &c. 6. 13, 14 ,. xiii. 23, 24 The narrow gate, or door. 7. 22,23 jt 25-7 I never knew you, &c. 8. x. 17-22 ,, xxi. 12-17 x Persecutions foretold. 9. xiii. 16, 17 ,, ,, x. 23, 24 Blessed are your eyes, &c. 10. 3 J -3 ?? xiii. 18, i9 2 Parables of Mustard Seed and Leaven. IT. xviii. 12, 13 ,, ,, xv. 4-7 The Lost Sheep. 12. xxiii. 37-9 3 ,, xiii. 33-6 O Jerusalem, &c. 13. xxiv. 28 ,, ,, xvii. 37 The eagles gathered to- gether. 1 Both this passage and Mk xiii. 9-13 are more closely parallel to Mt x. 17-22 than to Mt xxiv. 9-14. But the words certainly appear very unlikely to have been spoken at the first and temporary mission of the Apostles recorded in chapter x. It seems as if Matthew had at this point looked through all his materials, and collected from them all the sayings that had any bearing upon missionary work. 2 ovv, which is the true reading, seems intended to exhibit these pro- phetic parables as called forth by the success and progress recorded in v. 17. 3 The connexion in Matthew seems sufficiently good, but that in Luke is better still. HAWKINS 162 Statistics and Observations pt. in. B If these parallel passages, and especially Nos. 1-7, are examined, it will be seen that two accounts of the differences in their situations and contexts may be given. Speaking generally (for opinions will differ as to particular cases, especially towards the end of the list), either (a) Matthew altered their places, mainly with the purpose of combining them in collections of sayings, or (b) Luke did so, with the purpose of breaking up those collections into their component parts, and supplying for as many of the sayings as possible the occasions which drew them forth. Without attempting to decide or foreclose the question, I must say that to me the former alternative seems by far the more intrinsically probable, and by far the more accordant with the phenomena before us. 1 Those who agree with me in adopting that alternative will feel that the above instances lend some a priori probability to the supposition that it was Matthew, rather than Luke or Mark, who transferred sayings in such cases as the following : 1. Mt v. 13 compared with \ M . k ' 5 a } Salt losing its savour. I Lk xiv. 33, 34 2 f 2. (?) vi. 14 ,, Mk xi. 25 Forgiveness when praying. 3. viii. ii, 12 ,, Lk xiii. 28. 29 Many shall come from east and west, &c. 4- x - 34, 35 ,, xii. 51-3 Not peace but a sword, &c. 5. 37 xiv. 26 Loving (or hating) father or mother, &c. 3 6. 42 ,, ,, Mk ix. 41 Giving a cup of cold water. 3 1 Among the numerous modern supporters of this view, I would specify two American writers as particularly clear and forcible, Bacon, Sermon on the Mount, pp. 226 ff., also 222 note ; and E. D. Burton, Principles of Literary Criticism, &c.,pp. 35 ff. Another Chicago publication, Hobson's The Diates- saron of Tatian and the Syn. Problem (1904), brings out the way in which this process of compiling discourses was carried still further by Tatian, especially in his use of Luke's so-called Perean section (pp. 59-61, 76). 2 Observe the connexion implied by ovv. 8 Whether in these two cases the sayings come from the same source is very doubtful. See also p. 152. in S/. Matthew's Gospel 163 7. Mt xi. 21-4 compared with Lk x. 13-15 Woe to Chorazin, &c. 8. 25-27 ,, 21-23 Things hidden from the wise and prudent, &c. ( xxiii. 4, 6, 13, 23, ) f xi. 39, 42, ) Woes pronounced on 9- ] 2 5, 27, 29, > \ 43, 46- [ the Pharisees, &c. f 31,34-6 ) ( 52 ) 10. xxiv. 27 xvii. 24 As the lightning in the heavens. \ xvii. 26, 27, | As in the days of I 34, 35 { Noah, &c. 12. 43-51 ,, xii. 39-46 Watchfulness. See also other cases among the doublets (pp. 80 ff.), and among the passages marked * on pp. 108 f. : and cf. p. 195 (a). SECTION IV TRACES OF NUMERICAL ARRANGEMENTS IN MATTHEW Beneath the surface of this Gospel (and in one single case, viz. i. 17, upon its surface) there are to be found in- dications that it embodies some amount of matter which had been arranged in artificial and numerical forms, such as would assist the memories of oral teachers and of learners. This seems to have been done in Jewish fashion, and perhaps especially for the use of Jewish-Christian cate- chists and catechumens. The traces of it are found most often, though not exclusively, in those blocks of discourse which have already been referred to as showing signs of compilation. A. There seem to have been five principal Pereqs or chapters of such sayings : for when we think of (a) the five books of the Pentateuch, (b) the five books of Psalms, 1 (c) the five Megilloth,(^/) \hzfive divisions which Dr. Edersheim and 1 Dr. C. A. Briggs attributes this division of the Psalter ' to the middle of the second century, shortly before its translation into Greek ', and regards it as 'in some way connected with the five great feasts of Judaism ' (Int. Crit. Comm. on Pss. I. Ixxxviii). M 2 164 Statistics and Observations pt.m. B others trace in Ecclesiasticus, 1 (e) the Maccabaean history ' by Jason of Cyrene in five books ' which the writer of 1 Maccabees says (ii. 23) that he will * assay to abridge in one work ', in the course of which traces of a fivefold division seem still to show themselves in certain breaks, 2 (f)tint five parts which (besides some interpolations) Dr. Charles as well as previous scholars sees in the Book of Enoch, 3 and (g) the five Pereqs which make up the Pirqe Aboth> as distinct from the supplementary Pereq of R. Meir, it is hard to believe that it is by accident that we find in a writer with the Jewish affinities of Matthew the jfa# times repeated formula about Jesus ''ending' His sayings (vii. 28 ; xi. i ; xiii. 53 ; xix. 1 1 ; xxvi. i). Are we not reminded of the colophon which still closes the second book of Psalms, ' The prayers of David the son of Jesse are ended ' (Ps Ixxii. ao) ? 4 And as to early Christian literature, we are told by Eusebius both that the Exposition of Oracles of the Lord by Papias was divided vnto five avyypd^aTa (H. E. iii. 39, refer- ring to Irenaeus, who calls them /3i/3Aia), which may perhaps imply that he found the oracles which he expounded thus divided already ; and also that the work of Hegesippus which had come down to his days consisted of five memoirs or commentaries ({/Tro/ui^/xara, H. E. iv. 33). G 1 Speaker's Comm. on Ecclus., p. 19. Mr. R. G. Moulton speaks of the number 5 as seeming to be the favourite number in Wisdom literature generally : ' five books in Proverbs and Ecclesiasticus, five essays in Ecclesi- astes, and five discourses in Wisdom' ; Literary Study of the Bible, p. 404 : see also pp. 284, 386. But he does not seem to me to give satisfactory proofs of this, except as to Ecclesiasticus and perhaps Proverbs. 2 Viz. at iii. 40; vii. 42 ; x. 9, 10; xiii. 266 ; xv. 37. It should be observed especially how the verb 8r)\ovv, which is used in ii. 23, reappears in vii. 42 and x. 10. 3 See Book of Enoch, ed. Charles, pp. 25-32 ; Enc. Bibl. i. 221 f. ; Hastings' D. B. i. 706. * The LXX word here is el\iitov. For ovveTeXtafv used of the completion of discourse see Deut xxxi. i ; xxxii. 45 (B If ere A.e? . . . ras evdvufoeis avTwv ix. 4 ; xii. 25 (evOvfujms only Acts 1, Hebrews 1 besides, and not in LXX). 7. TO 7rpo/3aTa ra aTroXwXora OI'KOU 'lo-pa^X X. 6 ; XV. 24. 8. cv rats (rvvayayals avruv naa-Tiyv xxiii. 34. 9. ev cKtivto TWKaipw xi. 2$ ; xii. I ; xiv. I (Lk has Iv OUTWT. K. in xiii. I, and KUT K. K. in Acts xii. i and xix. 23). 10. ws 6 rjXios xiii. 43 ; xvii. 2 (so Rev i. 19 ; x. i). 11. ^wpis yvvaiK&v KOI TraiSiW xiv. 21 ; xv. 38. 12. 687/70! rvcpXot xv. 14 ; xxiii. 16, 24. 13. Tore fivai OVTOV 7rpo(Tu^d/Lie^oy ix. l8; xi.' I. (See also p. I95-) 9. TTTw^ouy, dvaneipovs, ^coXoy?, rv(p\ovs xiv. 13, with which cf. the very similar verse 21. 10. Kal rijv yvvaiKa xiv. 26 ; ^ yvvaiKa xviii. 29. 11. ot viol TOV alwvos TOVTOV xvi. 8 ; xx. 34. 12. TU7rre ro (Trrjdos eavrov xviii. 13 ; rvrrrovTes TO. VTai 7 ' also oxpeWrat aov at d/nap- Ttat . . . Tis OVTOS fO~Tiv os Kai a/jLapTias dcpirjaiv | Lk vii. 48, 49. 2. fj Trio-Tis orov o~o-(*Kv erf Lk viii. 48 = Mk v. 34 = Mt ix. 22 ] and Lk xviii. 42 = Mk x. 52 : also Lk vii. 50 and xvii. 19. 3. TTopevov els eipfjvTjv Lk viii. 48 = Mk v. 34 (waye) : also Lk vii. 50. (Cf. Acts xvi. 36 ; Jam ii. 16.) 4. HTJKCTI ovcuXXe TOV 8iddo~Ka\ov Lk viii. 49 = TI en o~Kv\\eis TOV 818. ; Mk v. 35 : also Kvpie, ^ O-KV\\OV Lk vii. 6. 5. ot de fjyvoovv TO pfjfM TOVTO Lk ix. 45 = Mk ix. 32 : also compare TJV TO pruia. TOVTO KCKpvp.jji.evov an avT&v, KOI OVK eyivuvKov TO. Xcyd- fjifva Lk xviii. 34. 6. TI TToirjo-as farjv aiwviov K\r}povofifjo-a) ; Lk xviii. 1 8 = Mk x. 17 (TI Trotjyao) ?va, and cf. also Mt xix. 16 o-^co) : also Lk x. 25. 7. OVK dK d(pf)o-ov- o-iv \idov eVi Xt^ov eV trot. But such repetitions are much more frequent in Matthew, and therefore they are treated here in connexion with that Gospel especially. Thus we find : ^tSi/cov Mt iii. 7 = Lk Hi. 7 : also Mt xii. 34 and xxiii. 33. (Cf. the transfer of the Baptist's words in Doublet No. 20, pp. 97 f.) 2. ev uevo'oKrjo-a Mt iii. 17 = Mk i. Ii = Lk iii. 22 : also Mt xvii. 5. 3. fjyyiKev 17 /3aV 686vro)v Mt viii. 12 = Lk xiii. 28 : also Mt xiii. 42, 50 ; xxii. 13 ; xxiv. 51 ; xxv. 30. 7. oi Trpo^rai /cat 6 vopos Mt xi. 13 = Lk xvi. l6 (6 i/d/u'. KOI ot 7rpo$.) : also (in the latter order) Mt v. 17, and vii. 12, and xxii. 40. 8. oWiff . . . av noirjo-T] TO 6f\r]p.a TOV iraTpos pov Mt xii. 50= Mk iii. 35 (os av . . . TOV 0eo) : also Mt vii. 21 (6 iroi5>v) ; cf. also xxi. 31. 9. vnayf oTTtVco p,ov, 2arai/5 Mt xvi. 23 = Mk viii. 33 : also i/Traye, Sarai/a Mt iv. IO. 10. e/xe de^erat Mt xviii. 5 = Mk ix. 37 = Lk ix. 48 (of receiving v S/. Matthew's Gospel 171 children) : also in Mt x. 40 (of receiving the Apostles ; it does not occur in Lk x. 16, which compare). 11. f\erjaov . . . vlos (or vie) Aaua'S Mt XX. 30, 31 = Mk X. 47, 48 = Lk xviii. 38, 39 : also Mt ix. 27 ; xv. 22. 12. (pofiuviJLfda TOV o^Xoy, irdvTfs yap ws npofpfjTTjv . . . a'XXoi> dov\ov . . . KOI a\\ov (cf. also Lk XX. II, 12) : also Mt xxii. 4 rraXiv aTreVrciXfv aXXovs SouXovff. 15. aTroXeVet avrovs Mt xxi. 41 = Mk xii. 9, and Lk xx. 16 tMroXfVei Tovff yewpyovs '. also Mt xxii. 7 aTrooXeo-ei/ rovs (povcls fKfivovs. 1 6. d'yaTr^o'fiS' TOV n\r)o~iov o~ov a>s (Tfavjov quoted in Mt xxii. 39 = Mk xii. 31 (and cf. Lk x. 27) : also in Mt xix. 19. 17. o\l/oiTai TOV vlov TOV dvOpwTTov fpxopfvov Mt xxiv. 37rov ep%6p,evov (where Mk ix. I and Lk ix. 27 mention only the kingdom as being seen). 1 8. d\rjdv CIVTOVS ojs cfywcriav t^wv, KOI ov% o>? ol y pa [Awards (Mark adds auro>i>), (a) in Mk i. 22 referred to the first preaching in the Capernaum Synagogue (and so Lk iv. 32 eV e^owia r\v 6 Xdyos auTou), but (b] in Mt vii. 29 referred to the impression made by the Sermon on the Mount much later in the Ministry. 2. KOKWS exovras TroiKiXais voo-ois, used (a) in Mk i. 34 (cf. Lk iv. 40) of the healings at eventide, but (b} combined in Mt iv. 24 with some other words from Mk iii. 7 ff. before the Sermon on the Mount. 3. on T)s (Mt oxrei) 7rpo/3ara /j.f) e^oz/ra Troifieva (Numb xxvii. 17 LXX) ; (a] in Mk vi. 34 placed before the Feeding of the 5,000, but (b} in Mt ix. 36 before the Mission of the Twelve which occurred earlier. 4. KOI dfpevres avrbv a7rf)\6av, used (a) in Mk xii. 12 after the Parable of the Wicked Husbandmen, but (b) in Mt xxii. 22 after the question as to tribute to Caesar rather later. (ii) Formulas differently placed by Matthew, by Mark, and by Luke : i. ov8c\s ovKeri e'roX/ua avrov eTTfparr^oYu is (in substance) placed (a) in Mk xii. 34, after the Two Great Commandments (omitted here in Luke) ; (b} in Mt xxii. 46, after the subsequent reference to Psalm ex ; but (c) in Lk xx. 40, after the earlier confutation of the Sadducees. 1 Compare the suggestions made on pp. 93-5. 2 Or almost always; for perhaps an exception may be found in the commendations by scribes given by Mark and Luke only, viz. (a) KO.\>S, Si$a(jna\, ITT' akrjOeias elves in Mk xii. 32 after the two great command- ments, but (b) 8i8daKa\e, Ka\u>s eiWs in Lk xx. 39 after the confutation of the Sadducees. v St. Matthew's Gospel 173 2. c{-f7r\f) an ^ Overbeck, p. 248, both in Eng. tr., besides more recent writers. 2 The tables given above on pp. 16-23 and 27-9 supply materials for many such proofs. 3 'Verbs compounded with prepositions' was the title of a third such Div. I. i S/. Luke's Gospel A. Words peculiar to one or other Gospel and to Acts. Fifty-eight words are peculiar to Luke and Acts, viz. 1 : 7rpo/3dXXo) TrpoTTOpevo/zm Trpoa-doKia 35 5 dvaffirda) dva(j)aivop.ai dvTflnov 10 ajroTivao'O'a) \ai .. fJLOVOV ... vopifa ... Trapi'oT/7/it, transitive ovvepxofj,at .. 10 rpo<^ ... rnot 'l Luke. Total. Chaps, i-xii. Chaps, xiii-xxviii. 2 14 3 II 2 10 5 5 2 6 6 3 12 2 10 I I? 4 13 I 8 2 6 2 7 2 5 I 5 2 3 2 16 9 7 I 7 2 5 I 5 5 ... 7 24 5 19 Total . . 25 131 41 90 l is used quite differently in Luke and Acts, being in the former applied only to persons, in the latter only to things known. It is curious that 6 of the above 12 words should happen to be used in Matthew much more frequently than in Luke, viz. fj Matthew 10, Kara = ' against' Matthew 14, KC\(IKD Matthew 7, Matthew 7, r/xxpj? Matthew 4, fopi Matthew 17. Two of the words are strongly Pauline, viz. povov and TrapiW^i transitive, being used 36 and 13 times in the 1 3 Epistles. iv. Words and phrases frequently occurring in Luke, but never in Acts. &?. . II 7T\Ol>(TLOS I I &. ayairda) . . . . 12 d/otapreoXo? . . . .17 eyeveTo with a finite verb . 22 a-rpa(pfis .... 7 1 See also p. 152 note 4 on the use of 'Iov5a?o<. 3 In Acts ix. 40 ; xvi. 18 we find (iriffrptyas used as arpa^ets is used in the Gospel. N 2 180 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c On the last four of these words more statistics will be found on pp. 16-23, where also will be found 31 other words and phrases, which, while occurring 4 times and upwards in Luke's Gospel, and being more or less characteristic of it, are absent from Acts. v. Words and phrases frequently occurring in Luke, but much more rarely in Acts. Acts. ^ Chaps. Chaps. Luke. Total. i-xii. xrii-xxviii. (OVTOV, &C. 57 22 8 14 eyfvcro with Kai . II I (?) I (?) ... (17TV Of, tllTOV O . 59 15 10 5 fv TW with infinitive . 32 .7 6 i eep^O)Ufli OTTO 13 3 ... 3 /cat avros, &C., nom. . 41 8 i 7 avros 6, &C. ii 2 ... 2 I c i ^ Total . o 239 62 27 35 'he doubtful case of eyeWro K a* is in Acts v. 7. All but the first of the above 8 words, &c., and some others pointing less decidedly in the same direction, may be examined on pp. 16-23. See also p. 14 on tva (Luke 45, Acts 15) and contrast with it onus on p. 6 (Luke 7, Acts 14). If the differences of vocabulary and phraseology which have been collected under these five headings are considered together, they seem to me to suggest the inference that the two books, though the works of the same writer, could not have proceeded from him at the same, or very nearly the same, time. Would it be at all likely that an author (unless he wished to conceal his identity, which we know from Acts i. i that this author did not wish) would so alter his style in two nearly contemporaneous books as, e.g., to drop ei7rez> 8e, h r

Vp(TK(i) 5 a7T(mi>acr . = kindle with yiverrdai IO 6/LttXeo) . 1 5 (TV vapirdfa r (cf. also Acts xiii. 44 ?) Total of Acts. Luke. I 2 I ... I ... I 4 2 ... I ... 3 ... 2 2 I 2 3 3 3 ... I i I i 2 ... I 5 3 2 i i 3 2 i I 30 23 28 1 Elsewhere the preposition is omitted. 2 On this and other notes of time see Harnack, Acts ofApp., E. T., pp. 10 f., 3!-4. 3 See Prof. Burkitt's interesting comparison of the' We'-Sections with the only account of a voyage in the third Gospel, viz. in viii. 22-5 (pp. tit., p. 1 12). Div. I. in Luke's Gospel 187 iii. Words and phrases found in the ' We '-Sections and also used predominantly, though not exclusively, in the rest of Acts or Luke or either of them 1 We ' Rest of Acts. .... 2 6 OTTOS 2 ..... I 9 oTTOo-Traco ..... I I arotros ..... I I 5 @ov\r) ..... 2 5 diaXeyouai ..... 2 8 diavoiyw ..... I 2 Siarpt/Sa) ...... 2 6 IO eaa> ...... 3 4 ei (xxvii. 20, 40 ; xxviii. 13 ?). 3 For ev0uSpojue'o> (xvi. ii ; xxi. i), Karayeo-0ai of coming to shore (xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12; cf. Lk v. 11), Ae'yojmai (xxvii. 8, 13), irXoos (xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9, 10), v (xxvii. 4, 7), and other such words are amply accounted for by the subject-matter. We do not find elsewhere rf} ere'pa for ' the next day ' (xx. 15 ?; xxvii. 3) ; but ' the next day ' happens to be spoken of so much more often in the ' We '- Sections than in any other passages of the same length 4 that there is nothing remarkable in there being a larger variety of Greek phrases to express it. On the whole, then, there is an immense balance of internal and linguistic evidence in favour of the view that the original writer of these sections was the same person as the main author of the Acts and of the third Gospel, and, 1 But see also ou (MKpav in Mk xii. 34 ; Jn xxi. 8. 2 On the medical use of irapaivf papos (?) rd(pos dndvrrjo-is * vinos vo-repos (?) t direvavTi (?) * ofyyos * 30 xaXenos t deiyuarifa 2O odvp/Jios \|/'6i;So/itipri'p 10 BrjXos OKVTjpOS wpatos * fKTOS * o\a>s Twenty-two words found in Mark (with or without Acts also) and Paul only: Trpoovcaprfpeo) * 5 oTroarepeo) d tipnvtvtt One hundred and three words found in Luke (with or without Acts also) and Paul only : adr)\os dvaKpiva* * di/raTroSofia aj/aXiV/cw ava\v(i) ' ' * IO ai/o/^ro? 5 dvd0ffj.d * (ivoid "t" al(pvidios (e(pv. WH in Luke) avTaTroKpivopat 1 5 Div. I. iv diro\oyeop,ai * Spa* 2O dporptdo) do- (?) * Soy/za * 5uj/do-n/s * t evypdfpofjuii 3 5 ea7rooreXXa> * 40 fVi/xeXeo/iai t f7nai'j/a> * t epyatfia * 45 cvyevrjs * (j)i(TTT]fJLl Karaya) 50 55 KlvdwCVto * Kparaioopai 60 vop,odiddcrKa\os * t 65 olKovop.ia OTTTao-ta * 6crtdrj;s Trayis 70 TrayoTrXia jravovpyta irarpia 75 Treptrroie'ofiai * t I 9 I J. TrpoSdr?/? * t 8O TTpOKOTTTO) TTVKlxfc (?) * f o-iyda> * O-KOTJ eco 85 (TTflpOS (TVVaVTl crvve * 90 (TfOTTJplOV 95 V7roo-Tpe'(pu> (?) * (popos IOO (pp6vr)(ris Xapiop.ai * ^nptrdco Also the form o6r& * (for ovStis) may be noted ; and TO dpryupov * used of quotations (p. 33). Twenty-one words found in John (with or without Acts also) and Paul only : Karrjyopia t 1*5 ^ a p<^l^6fop.ai fj.aivop.iii * I O VOfJLr) f TTfplTOfJLT) 7rrj\6s 2O *f 'lu-parjKfiTrjs * O/iCOf o?rXo^ 66vfjLT)(ris and ravpos, which are also in Acts *). Five words are found only in Mark and Hebrews (there being none which are also in Acts). Sixteen words are found only in Luke and Hebrews (besides nine which are also in Acts). Four words are found only in John and Hebrews (besides f%dfs, which is also in Acts). Twenty-two words are found only in Acts and Hebrews. Forty-six words are found only in Paul and Hebrews. It may be well to give the words, so far as concerns the Gospels and Acts : In Matthew and Hebrews only : eXeqpai', iXecos, o-vireXaa, rpifioXof. In Mark and Hebrews only: u7ro/3aXXo>, ^a7rno-/ioy, ?K J, dv&Tepov, aTraXXao-o-w j, dno- ypd(j)op.ai, avrpov J, 6ia/3cuVa> J, Siari&ftcu J , efcXewra), ei/o^X/o), evderos, %\os J, ffpareia, tXa<7KO/^iat, Xvrpaxns, /neTO^oy, TraXaioa), TravTe\r)S,irapa\v- o/uai |, irapirjfu, irapoiKfu, TroXi'rqs J, TroppvOfv, avvavTato J, TeXeuocris, $ya>. (The 9 words marked J are also in Acts, the remaining 16 are in Luke and Hebrews only.) In John and Hebrews Only : yqpaoTcw, eXarr, rdxfiov (?), UO-O-COTTOS. 1 On the mention of Acts see the remark in square brackets above, which applies here also. . i. iv S/. Luke's Gospel 193 In Acts and Hebrews Only : aywpa, do-aXeuroy, doretoy, f3of)0fia, ao-ft/xi, ei/rpo/zo?, fViore'AXa), fpvdpos, eVeorfpo?, KaiTot, Karanavvis, Karanava), *ara(peirya>, Kf)aXaiov (but in different Senses), op#ds, Trapo^uo-p-oy, iraTpidpxqs, v\f$6v, virapgis (see also the nine words marked J above). It may also be noticed that there are (a) nine words occurring in Luke, Acts, Paul, and Heb only, viz. aioo>, d, and ten words in Luke, Paul, and Heb only, viz. TTOKfijucu, aTroXvrpaxrtff, Karap-yew, KOITTJ, \eirovpyia, rat-is, TOLVVV 2 ; (<:) and it may be added that there are seventeen words found in Acts, Paul, and Heb Only, viz. aXXaorao), avayicaios, dvtrjfju, a, TTtKpta, TTOU (?), 7rpo(r^)opa, (TKXrjpvva), v But such cases are much fewer when we turn to the other Gospels, there being none in Matthew, Acts, Paul, and Heb only, and two in Matthew, Paul, and Heb only, viz. /xera/xe- Aojuat and ^perro) ; one in Mark, Acts, Paul, and Heb only, viz. 7rapa5^xMt, 3 and one in Mark, Paul, and Heb only, viz. a^a)oti/x^?}o-Ka) ; three in John, Acts, Paul, and Heb only, viz. awo, Sa>pea, Xi0a 4^ tf ; 53, 54 ; xii. i a and ; 29 b ; 32, 33 * J 35~ 8 ; 4i ; 5^ ; 54, 55 (?) ; xiii. 22, 23 ; 25-7 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 3 ; xvii. 3 b, 4 ; 5 ; 20-2 ; 30 ; 37 a ; xviii. 31 ; 34; 43 ; xix. 28 ; 37; xx. i60; 20 ; 26 ; 350, 36^,38^; 39; xxi. 130; 18; 19; 21 , 22 ; 25 ; 26 #; 34-6 ; 37, 38 ; xxii. 3 ^ ; 15 ; 19 b, 2O ; 40 ; 43, 44 ; 45 ; 48 b ; 49 ; 61 a ; 65 ; 66 # ; 67, 68 ; xxiii. 2 ; 4-6 ; 14-16 ; 22 b, 23 ; 34 a ; 45 <* J 4 8 ; 5 1 5 53 ^ ; 5" 5 xxiv. 40 ; 5 ^ ; 7, 80; II; 12; 3<5; 40; 51 ; 52^. If these 113 verses are added to the 499, the number is 612, being more than half the 1,149 verses in the Gospel. 2 An attempt, which can only be tentative and to a large extent speculative, 3 will now be made to classify these smaller additions, and to suggest a possible or probable account of them. 1 Including, of course, the 132 verses of chapters i and ii. 2 In Westcott, Introd. to Study of Gospels, p. 195 (8th ed, 1895), the peculiar matter in Luke is estimated at 59 per cent. 3 It is on this account that it has been placed so late in the book. A similar examination of the minor additions in Matthew failed to supply materials for such classification. civ. ii St. Luke's Gospel 195 Luke may have retained, while Matthew omits, the occasions of sayings which they drew from a common source : Lk xi. i ; 45, 46 a ; xii. 41 ; xiii. 22, 23 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 3 1 ; xvii. 5 ; 20-2 ; 37 a ; perhaps also x. 25, 26. (Compare xi. 37, 38, in the list on p. 15 : and see p. 161.) (*) Luke may have retained the original narrative in its fullness, while Matthew, after his manner, shortened it: Lk vi. 17 a (?) ; vii. 30, 4, 5, 6, 70; 10 ; 20, 21. (See p. 158.) The following may be later insertions from other sources ; they are placed by WH in single or double brackets : Lk v. 39 ; xxii. 20; 43, 44; xxiii. 34 a\ xxiv. 12; 36 ; 40; 51 0; 52 a. The following may be either independent traditions, or variants of traditions preserved also elsewhere : Lk vii. 29, 30 (cf. Mt xxi. 32); xi. 40, 41 (cf. Mt xxiii. 25, 26); 44 (cf. Mt xxiii. 27, 28); xii. i b (cf. Mt xvi. 6; Mk viii. 15); 35-8 (cf. Mt xxv. 6 and Mk xiii. 34-6) ; 52 (cf. Mt x. 36) ; [perhaps 54, 55, if Mt xvi. 2, 3 is accepted as genuine ;] xiii. 25-7 (cf. Mt vii. 22, 23 ; xxv. n, 12); xvii. 3 b, 4 (cf. Mt xviii. 21, 22) ; xxi. 19 (cf. Mtxxiv. 13 ; Mk xiii. 13 b}. w Among the additions which may be editorial, some bring out the prayerfulness which is assumed to be the constant habit of Jesus : Lk vi. 12 b ; ix. 18 a; 28 b, 29 a. See also Hi. 21 ; v. 16; xi. i. Others emphasize the right use of wealth, the duty of liberality, &c. : Lk vi. 33, 34, 37 b, 38 a\ xii. 32, 33 a ; and the mention of leaving all in v. n and 28. (Compare, among the longer passages named on p, 15, Lk vi. 24-6; xii. 13-21 ; xiv. 1-14; 28-33; xvi. 1-12, 14, 15, 19-31 ; and perhaps viii. 1-3.) 1 Perhaps also verses i, 2: but cf. Mt ix. 10, n ; Mk ii. 15, 16 ; Lk v. 29, 30. O 2 196 Statistics and Observations PI. in. c Other such additions may be described as merely heightening the effect of the narrative. The words of them are given here, so that they may be examined together : Lk iii. 1 8 TroXXa p.cv ovv /cat ercpa 7rapaKa\S>v cvr)yye\ifTO TOV \aov *. ,, iii. 19 b Koi TTfpl TrdvTMv l>v tmbjirtv Trovrjpwv 6 'Hpaftrjs. iii. 2O a TTpofffdrjKev KOI TOVTO cVi irdo-iv. iv. 15 KCU avTos fSldao~Kv fv rat? o~vvaya>yals avTwv, doa6fj.fvos VTTO ,, v. 17 b KOI dvvafjiis Kvpiov rjV els TO lao-Qai vi. II el avrol de fTT\f]0~6r)o~av dvoias. ix. 43 a et-firXfjo-Q-ovTO 8e navrcs eVi 777 /AfyaXftdr^ri TOV deov f. ix. 43 b TTavTwv 8e Qavpa^ovTUV eVt nao-iv ols eVot'et t. x i- 53) 54 fjpaw i ypnpp-QTf'is Kal oi $apratot Seivcos Koi anoo~To^aTi^cii> avTov TTfpl TrXciorwy, fvedpevovTes CLVTOV 6r)p\!V p.vpiddo)i> TOV o^Xou, wore KaTcnraTflv d\\f)\ovs. ,, xviii. 43 b KOI iras 6 \abs tSobj/ edwKev aivov rw deV fLaGrjTwv -)(aipovTS alvc'iv TOV Oebv V TO. irp6o~a)7ra els TYJV yqv. Compare with one another the passages marked * and t re- spectively, and observe the use of TTOS or oW 10 times in these 17 short passages; also in v. 170. Perhaps some other additions, which have been left for class (t), might also have been placed here, e. g. Lk iii. 15 ; xx. 20 b ; 26 a\ xxiii. 53 b. W The following seem to be Pauline expressions, introduced by Luke because so familiar to himself : J Lk viii. 12 b (Iva 1 The only similarities named here are some of those in which the Epistles seem to have suggested the language of the Gospel : in numerous other cases the reverse of this appears to me more probable ; e. g. in i Cor vii. 34 f. there is almost certainly a reminiscence of Lk x. 39-41 ; and in Rom xii. 14, i Cor iv. 12 of Lk vi. 28 (ev\o-yei7t not being genuine in Mt v. 44). The use of i Thes iv. 8 and Lk x. 16 may have originated in either. ii S/. Luke's Gospel 197 X. 8 b compared with I Cor X. 27 nav TO irapan- vfj.lv ea6ifT ) where the words are almost identical, though the object of the precept is different ; xx. 16 b (w yivotro being used only here, and Paul 14) ; xxi. 34-6 compared with i Thes v. 3, 4 (atyvidios . . . tViaraTeu KrA.) ; xxii. 53 b f) fgovo-ia rov VKOTOVS as in Col i. 13. And xxi. 18 recalls St. Paul's spoken words as recorded in Acts xxvii. 34. (Thus also, in one of the longer passages peculiar to Luke, ch. XVlii. I mivTore irpocrfvxeaQai reminds US of I Thes V. 1 6, 17 Other additions, of various kinds, which may be regarded as probably editorial : Lk iii. i, 2 (historical introduction fixing the date) ; 5, 6 (lengthening a quotation) ; 15 ; iv. i # * ; 13 3 ; 14 ofjtai * (pvreia 1 1 o x\afjiv s 2 if/evSoftapTVpia * 2 100 ffwrdaao} 3 * Total 112, of which 36 are marked * as not in LXX, and 18 are marked t as being non- Classical. Besides proper names and numerals and the Aramaic word pand, the words rpvir^a and r)fj,ia> are omitted as not being in WH's text, though the evidence for them seems strong. Of the above 112 words, 8 1 are used only once ; 2 1 are used twice ; 6 are used three times ; and 4 are used four times or oftener, and are therefore treated among the 'characteristic words and phrases ', pp. 4-8. Of the words peculiar to Matthew five-sevenths, and of the words peculiar to Mark and to Luke six-sevenths, are used only once. Words peculiar to Mark. dypevoj 25 firiavvrpfx 03 * t irpOfj.fpifjivdQ} *f dXaXos 3 (aXt6s (or S?;A..) * 4*0av/iacu effTT)s * rpt'^cy * fKirepiffffws * ) ova * f rpVfJ.aXid {" 20 fvayKaXifrfMi f 2 VCU&fttP virepr) t as being only another form of Perhaps 7rcfj should be added, as irc&i may be the right reading in Mt xiv. 13. KUTTTW is omitted, because it occurs also in Peric. de Adult., Jn viii. 6, 8 (?). Words peculiar to Luke (Gospel only). 30 diroO\i&oj yt\do) 2 ay pa * 2 dypavXio) * ditopjdaaonai * 60 SUKTV\IOS dyojvia (??) diropia alffOdvofJiai dvdOrjpa (?) dvaiSia 15 dvd\r]n\//ts * dvdirtipos * f 1 2 dvaTaaaop.ai * dv(K\eiTTT05 * dvTifca\e(u f 2 25 avTirrfpa * aTTatrecy dirapTiap.6s * 35 dpiyj/ aporpov dpxiT\wvr]S * f dffrpdiTTQ} 2 40 dtrcwrw? * (adj. LXX) aTCKVOS 2 arfp 2 avffTijpos 2 avTOITTTjS * 45 a/x>s * dOpCQ) * 115 !77/wp('a f 2 1)705 2 2 (?) 17 76/10 vm 1 20 0ecapta 6ijptvo) Opavoj 6p6p.&os * (??) j 2 C 0V LltCiQi} ISpws (??) 130 taws /caraSfcy KaraicXivQ) 5 135 Karavevu * KCLTairXcoD * 140 Ktpdriov * K\ivi8iov * 2 145 K\taia Koirpla ico-vpiov KOpOS 150 Kpanrd\i) * WH) Kpvirrrj * f \ap.irpui * 155 fJ.(VOVV Aefos 1 60 ptaOios 3 OS * f J/0(T<7ld 165 orrros 1 70 opcivos 2 (opivosVfll) pvs navir\r)8fi 1 80 TrapoAtos s* a,(?) irap&evia 185 TTfptKpVirTW * 190 irepioiKcca* irfpioiKos ircpiairdopai irrjyavov * mtfa 195 irivaKtuiov* tr\rjp.fjivpa. f irpayp.artvop.ai irpaKTOJp 2 irpeaftda 2 200 irpofieXeTaoti * irpoaavafiaiva) TtpoaSairavdoJ * f rrpoaepydop.ai * Trpopovip:cas * (adj. in LXX) 2 55 XpfO(pl\TT)S "f* 2 260 i[/u>xa7rriWa>, SfvrfpoVpwros * t, and /ioyt?, but they are not in WH's text. BXaTrrw is omitted, being also in App. to Mark (xvi. 18). Words found both in Luke and Acts, but peculiar to them. aiTiov * 3 + 1 (VfSpevo) Aot/ios dva^iKWfjLi tviaxvo) (?? Lk) oSwdoftai 3 + 1 dvar)Tca> 21 *tfs 2 + 3 6fJU\(OJ 2 + 2 dva.Ka.Oifa * IrrfTSov irapa,0idona.t 5 dvaairdo) 25 6TTl&l0dfa 2 + 1 45 trpi\dfj,iroj dva dvevpiffKOj (THXipt& 1 + 2 irponopcvoftai dvTfTirov fffirepa 1 + 2 irpoaSoKia dnofpatpri cv\a0r)s l + 3 irpoinrapxoJ 10 diro8exH ai 2+5 30 tvrovas 50 cfrpaTrjyos 2 + 8 dtronvaaau OdpPos 2 + 1 arpaTia (?) 8iairope(a* 1 + 3 i'aaty 1 + 2 ffvyyevcia. 1 + 2 SiarrjpfQ} KaOerjs * 2 + 3 ert'i'apTrcifaj 1+3 Siiffrrjp.1 2+1 KaOirjm 1 + 3 avv0d\\(iv 2+4 15 Siiffxvpi^ojj.at * 35 KafloTi 2 + 4 55 avvftfju (cVO () biodevaj aTatf\t in Luke iv. 16, though it is not adopted by WH. *Op0pos is omitted, because occurring also in Peric. de Adult. , Jn viii. 2. dyaOovpytu * \ > dyvifffjios dyvoaaros dyopaios * 5 dypdwaros * alrtwfjLa * } dKardrcpiTOs * f dicpifieia 10 dfcpoaTrjpiov * d/feoAuTcwy * dAAd^vAos d/idprypos* 15 dp.vvop.ai dva@a0fj.6s dva&d\\op.ai dvaf3o\r) 20 dvatpeffis dva/tpiais dvavriprjTos * dvavTtprjTus * dpaTre^cu 25 di'ao'/ffvdfa; * dvcrdfa f 30 di/0u7raTos dvriKpvs * dl/TiTTtTTTft; dvTo0opd 100 SidffTrjfia SiaTf\QJ 105 iio 8tKaffTT)S 8lOTtTrjS * 8t6pOojfj.a * SvafVTfpiov * 8a)SfKd f 205 /caraAotTros Karavvoaofj.ai -\ 2IO Karafpepoj 2 1 5 aTt'ScyAos * f 1 Kare(pi7tos * Xvp.aivop.ai \vrpcarrjs "f" 235 ^wayta * fjiaOrjTpia * fMfcpoOvnoos * f fjiavia 240 ^a(TTtfey yL*7aAro? pear) fj.fi pia 245 fj.eTa/3d\\ofjai 250 255 * f vavK\jjpos * vavs veoiKopos * vrjoiov * oSotrropecu * 206 Statistics and Observations pt. in 260 OlKoSofJtOS UKVCQ) 6\oK\t]pia ^ 265 dirrdvofJLCu f dpyvtd * opoOcffla * t ovpavoOfv iravrri 270 dx^-OTiWcw* f iraOrjros * iravoiKti 275 napaivea) irapa\yoftat * TrapavofJ-fca 280 irapairXfca* napdffr) fjios trapareivo} irapa.Tvyx& vo} * irapaxf ifJ-CLffia * 285 irapcvoxX(O) * * 290 irarpwos irepairepca (?) * IffpiaffTpCUTTCl} *j- irepiKparr)* f 295 300 TrXoos ITVIKTOS * irvofj iro\ndpx^ * "t* irops * paSiovpyrjfia * 330 paSiovpyta * priTWp * (raws (Tf $a(TT05 * 335 aifcdpios * f OlfJLlKlvOlOV * (rtTtW 340 aterjvoiroios * f ffKQ}\r)K6l3pa}TOS * airfpfj.o\6yos * 345 arepeoo} crvvaOpoifa avvaXi^Ofiai * 350 (TwaAXao-o-cu * avvfiririOffJiai ffVVKlVfQ} * 355 avvOpvnrca * f ffWHarafiaivoj 360 365 TJ aos 400 (pi\opovoas fypvyavov APPX.A The Synoptists and the Septuagint 207 X&pos * f 405 wvtofj.cu 410 Total 413, of which 154 are marked * as not in LXX and 66 are marked t as non-Classical. If 'Aa-idpxrjs *, 'EAAjji/iorrjs * t, Taftcpvi] * f, 4>opoi/ * f were placed in this list instead of being excluded as proper names, and if Karfjyopos were included notwithstanding the occurrence of Karfjywp in Rev xii. 10, the number would be raised from 413 to 418. There is also good authority for avayvmpL^ai, though it is not in WH's text. The use of Classical and non-Classical words by the Synoptisls. After drawing up the above lists with reference to the LXX, I thought that it might be convenient to show on the same pages the relative proportions of Classical and non-Classical words among' the words peculiar to each Synoptist. So, with Prof. Geden's kind permission, I have transferred to those pages the mark t, which in Moulton and Geden's Concordance denotes words ' not in Classical Greek use', which phrase is explained in their preface (p. x) as meaning that ' the word in question does not occur in Greek writers earlier than the Christian era '. Such words are found to occur in the following proportions among the words peculiar to the Synoptists respectively : In Mark, they are 19 out of 71 words peculiar to him, i.e. very slightly more than one-fourth. In Matthew, they are 18 out of 112 words peculiar to him, i.e. rather more than one-seventh. In Luke, they are 38 out of 261 words peculiar to his Gospel, i. e. almost exactly one-seventh. And if we add to the words peculiar to Luke's Gospel those which are also found there and in Acts, the non-Classical words amount to 40 out of 319, i.e. almost exactly one-eighth. In Acts, they are 66 out of 413, or rather less than one-sixth. It thus appears that the non-Classical words (like the non- Septuagintal words) occur with considerably more frequency in the special vocabulary of St. Mark than in those of the other Synoptists. 208 Statistics and Observations Pt. in APPENDIX B TO PART III (seep. 143) THE ALTERATIONS AND SMALL ADDITIONS IN WHICH MATTHEW AND LUKE AGREE AGAINST MARK AMONG the 183 sections into which Tischendorf divides his Synopsis Evangelica, there are 68 * which afford opportunities for comparing parallel portions of all three Synoptic Gospels. But of these 68 there are 10 (viz. 14, 15, 17, 47,' 50, 56, 75, in, 134, 139) in which a considerable amount of matter, chiefly consisting of discourse, is found in Matthew and Luke, while it is absent from Mark. It seems reasonable, therefore, to suppose that in these sections, or in most of them (for perhaps 14 and 15 and possibly 17 must be otherwise accounted for 3 ), the editors of Matthew and Luke turned to the Matthaean Logia, or some other such document (Q), in search of additional matter which should contain more of the teaching of Jesus than was supplied by Mark. 4 There remain 58 of Tischendorf s sections which can be almost entirely accounted for by a free use of the Marcan source, with occasionally some short insertions made by Matthew and Luke independently of one another. These sections may be thus sub- divided into three classes : 1 There would have been 69, if, in 132, Lk x. 25-7 had been printed opposite to Mk xii. 28-34 5 Mt xxu '- 34 ~4<>, as it is in Synopttcon, p. 88. 2 With 47, cf. 91 : Tischendorfs arrangement is here less clear and satisfactory than usual. See Synopticon, pp. 17, 18. 3 It may be that these sections, or at any rate 14, 15, were abbre- viated by a subsequent editor of Mark (see p. 152) because they were prior to the public ministry of Jesus, with which this Gospel is mainly con- cerned, j' 4 There may probably have been a similar reference to Q when 49, 128, 138 were being drawn up, though we happen to have in them no im- portant cases of agreement between Matthew and Luke. For Mt xxi. 44 is probably not genuine. . B Agreements of Matthew and Luke 209 a. There are 7 sections (viz. 25, 29, 33, 142, 147, 148, 159) in which there is no instance of Matthew and Luke agreeing against Mark. b. There are 30 other sections (viz. 16, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40, 48, 51, 5 2 73, 109, iM> n6, 118, 128, 130, 131, 133, 138, 143, 144, 145, 146, 153, 157, 161, 162, 163, 164, 166) in which slight verbal agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark are not infrequent. I have noted about zoo 1 of them (including some which extend only to portions of words, such as Mt xx. 30 Lk xviii. 37 irape'pxerat ; and Mt xxvi. 2O dre/mro, Lk XX. 14 But they can all be explained, with more or less probability, by one of three causes. Either (a) they consist of words so ordinary and colourless and so nearly synonymous with Mark's that the use of them may be merely accidental (e. g. Mt xxii. 27 ; Lk xx. 32 uorfpop 2 against Mk xii. 22 eo-xarov; Mt xxii. 45; Lk xx. 44 KnXd against Mk xii. 37 At'y 6 ')* or (&) tnev are sucn obvious amplifications or explanations as it would be natural for any writers to introduce (e.g. the additions of ftiavpao-av in Mt viii. 27; Lk viii. 25; of fls TOV OIKOV avrov in Mt ix. 7 ; Lk v. 26 ; of KO! ea-duiv in Mt xii. i, and KOI fja-Qiov in Lk vi. i ; of povois in Mt xii. 4 and povovs in Lk vi. 4 ; of ISovTcs in Mt xxi. 38 ; Lk xx. 14) ; or (y) they are changes to a more smooth and usual Hellenistic vocabulary and style from the comparative harshness and ' unusualness ' of Mark. This last is probably the account to be given of the great majority of these agreements, as may be seen by an examination of pages 131 ff. of this book. It need only be pointed out here that the most numer- ous, though of course the most unimportant, of such identities are caused by the strong preference of Mark for the historic present (p. 143), and for nal rather than 8e (p. 150), and that not a few result from his sparing use of conjunctions, &c. (p. 137). c. There remain 21 sections (viz. 37, 49, 53, 58, 59, 70, 71, 72, 115, 122, 124, 126, 154, 155, 156, 165, 167, 169, 171, 172, 173). In these I have noted about 118 * agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark which are of the same kinds as those referred to in the preceding paragraph (<5), and for which the three explanations there suggested (a, /3, y) would be adequate, at any rate if there were no other such agreements to be con- 1 Only approximate numbers are given, because of various readings. 2 This word is characteristic of Matthew (p. 8). 210 Statistics and Observations Pt.ni sidered with them. But there are others: in these sections there are certain other alterations from, and additions to, the Marcan narrative, as to which it seems almost impossible that Matthew and Luke could have accidentally concurred in making them. In these cases at least the changes seem to be owing to some influence, direct or indirect, of a common source, and not to the independent judgement of two compilers. I append a list of the instances which to me convey this impression most forcibly, adding references to the pages of Synopticon, in which they can most easily be examined, as well as to Tischendorf s sections. 1 Tisch. Synop- Syn. Ev. ticon, Page. 1. Mt ix. 17 lxrrot : Lk v. 37 (KxvOrjfffTcu, whereas in Mk ii. 22 the verb air6\\vT : Lk ix. II of 8e o^A.ot yvovres TjKoXovOrjaav avr> (cf. also the mention of healing in Mt(v. 14) and Lk only) 59 40 6. Mt xvi. 16 ; Lk ix. 20, the use of rov 0eot), though not quite in the same connexion . . . . . 70 53 7. Mt xvii. 5 6Tt avrov \a\ovvros : Lk ix. 34 ravra 5e avrov Ae-yoi/ros . ........ 71 57 - 8. Mt xvii. 17 ; Lk ix. 41 Kal Sifarpa^fjifvr} added (cf. Deut xxxii. 5) 72 60 9. Mt xix. 29 ; Lk xviii. 30 iro\\an\aaiova, instead of (KaTovrarrXaffiova Mk x. 30 115 71 10. Mt xxi. 17 r)v\iaer) : Lk xxi. 37 r)v\i&TO (but the words are not in quite the same position) .... 124 70 11. Mt xxi. 23 SiSdffKovri : Lk xx. i SiSda/eovTos, where Mark has no mention of teaching .... 126 81 12. Mt xxvi. 50 ; Lk xxii. 48, the fact that Jesus then spoke to Judas, though the words recorded are not the same in the two Gospels 154 IID 1 There is a full discussion of this list in Prof. Burkitt's Gospel History, &c., pp. 42-58, and a reference to it by Mr. C. H. Turner in J. T. S., x. 174 ff. (Jan. 1909), to which I would call attention. I quite agree that textual criticism has diminished, and is likely to diminish further, from the force of several of the instances ; and, on the other hand, I have not been able to find any others that seem worth adding to them (1909). . B Agreements of Matthew and Luke 211 Tisch Synop- Syn. Ev. ticon. Page. 13. Mt xxvi. 75 ; Lk xxii. 62 /cat cfeXOuv f 70, 117, 131, 134, 144, 150, 151, 152. Acts : its linguistic relations with Luke, 1 74 if. ; with Paul, 1 89 ff. ; with Hebrews, 192 f. ; with LXX, 203 ff. ; the two parts of it, 181. Additions of minor kinds to the narrative in Mark, 127. Agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark, 208 ff. Allen, Archdeacon W. C, 52, 65, 84, 118, 120, 131, 137, 142, 167. Anacoluthon in Mark, 135. Apostles, apparent disparage- ments of, in Mark, 121 f. Aramaic phrases in Mark, 130. Asyndeton in Mark, 137. Bacon, Prof. B. W., 66, 83, loo, 162. Badham's Formation of the Gospels, 80. Blass, 31,48, 56, 133,153. Briggs, Dr. C. A., 163. Bruce, Dr. A. B., 76, 116, 120, 121. Burkitt, Prof., 54, 154, 183, 186, 210. Burton, Prof. E. De W., 67, 162. Caesar, Julius, on the Druids, 54. Carpenter and Harford-Bat- tersby's Hexateuch, 2, 113. Cary, G. L., 68. Characteristic words and phrases of the three Synoptists, 4 ff., 184. Charles, Dr. R. H., 116, 164. Chase, Bishop, 181. Classical and non-classical words, 135, 207. Compilation in Mark, suggested signs of, 116. Compilation of discourses in Mat- thew, 161 ff. Compound verbs, 1 74 f. 'Context-supplements' in Mark, 125 f. Dalman, 32, 38, 52. Davidson, Dr. S., 174, 183. Deissmann, 134. Dictation a cause of errors, 67. Different applications of the same words, 67 ff. Diminutives in Mark, 132. Documents, use of written, 54, 107. Double negatives in Mark, 142. Doublets, 80 ff. Driver, Dr., 54, 113. Drummond, Dr. J., 70. Duplicate expressions in Mark, 139 ff. Be and *al in Mark, 150. Edersheim, Dr., 163, 167. Enoch, Book of, 164. eXe-yey, eAryoi/, 12, 52. cv&W, cvOvs, 12, 141. Field, Dr. F., 71, 122, 123. Fivefold divisions of books, 164. ' Formulas/ repetitions and trans- ferences of, 168 ff. Four Gospels, sayings contained in them all, 88. Freedom used by compilers, 26, H3> 173- Geden, Prof., 54, 207. Gore, Bishop, 158. Gould, Prof., 46, 76, 1 1 8. Harnack, 49, 50, 78, no, 112, 113, 181, 183. ' He that hath ears/ c., 106. Hebraisms in Luke, 198. Hebrews, Epistle to, 192 f. Hershon's Talmudic Miscellany, 167. 222 Index Historic present, 143 ff., 213. Hobart, Dr., 189. Hobson, A. A., on Tatian, 67, 80, 162. Hort, Dr., 16. Imperfect tense rare in Matthew, 9 5 1 - Inge, Prof. W. R., 168. Irenaeus, 116, 127, 164. Idov, 14, 141, 144. ^/i and 'ifpoo-oXv/ia, 19. Jason of Cyrene, his history in five books, 164. 'Jews, the,' the occurrences of this title, 152. John, Gospel of, 88, 138, 143, 144, 151,152,167. Josephus, 54, 144. Jiilicher, 84, HI, 114, 131, 154. Justin Martyr, use of the Gospels by, 218. Knowling, Dr., 181, 185, 188. KOI and 8e in Mark, 150. Koivfi Greek, 135, 143. xvpie, 212. Lake, Prof. K., 39, 99, 142. Latinisms in Mark, 132. Lightfoot, Dr. John, 61. Lightfoot, Bp. Joseph B., xiii. Logia ascribed to Matthew, 107. And see ' Q '. Lord's Prayer in Matthew, 32, 166. Luke, Gospel of: Preface to, vii ; characteristic words and phrases, 15 ff., 27 ff. ; Doublets, 99 ; linguistic relations with Acts, I74ff. ; with the 181. York Powell, Prof., on powers of memory, 54. Zeller on Acts, 174, 182 f. THE END OXFORD PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS BY HORACE HART, M.A. PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY CLAKENDON PRESS BOOKS THEOLOGY The Holy Scriptures, Apocrypha, etc The Bible in English Reprint of the Authorized Version of 1611. 4to. isss. s 3s.net. The Authorized Version. Complete lists of Oxford Bibles, Oxford Bibles for Teachers, Oxford Prayer Books, Church Sets, etc, in all styles and bindings can be obtained from any bookseller, or from Mr. Henry Frowde, Oxford University Press, Amen Corner, London, E.G. The Revised Version. [The Revised Version is the joint property of the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge.] Edition for the Church Desk. Folio. In buckram, with the Apocrypha, 2 2s. net. Bound in Grained Cowhide, 2 10s.; with the Apocrypha, 3; in Turkey Morocco, 4 4s.; with the Apocrypha, 4 16s. Library editions, in large type (pica). Bound in cloth and greatly reduced in price. Royal 8vo, with large margins : with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., from 1 9s. ; the Apocrypha only, 10s. fid. ; the other five volumes, 18s. 6d. Demy 8vo, with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., 1 Is. ; the Apocrypha only, 7s. 6d. ; the other five volumes, 14s. Single volume editions : Royal 8vo, on Oxford India Paper, and in large type (pica), in Persian, 2 12s. 6d.; with the Apocrypha, in Turkey Morocco, 3 19s. Royal 8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 10s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from 19s. 6d. 8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 7s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from 10s. 6d. 8vo, minion type. In cloth, 4s. ; with the Apocrypha, 6s. ; the Apocrypha only, 3s. 16mo, ruby type. In cloth, 2s. 6d. ; with the Apocrypha, 4s. ; the Apocrypha only, 2s. ; with the Oxford Helps, in leather, from 7s. 16mo, nonpareil type. In leather, from 3s. 16mo, pearl type. In cloth boards, from 8d. ; with Oxford Helps, from 2s. 6d. The Revised Version with marginal references. 8vo, in bourgeois type, from 6s. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 15s. 8 vo, in minion type, from 5s. ; with the Apocrypha, from 7s. 6d. ; with Oxford Helps, from 11s. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 14s. 16mo, in nonpareil type, in leather, from 6s. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 10s. 6d. The Parallel Bible, containing the Authorized and Revised Versions in parallel columns. Small quarto, in minion type. On ordinary paper, from 10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 16s. The Two-Version Bible, being the Authorized Version with the differences of the Revised Version printed in the margins, so that both texts can be read from the same page. With references and maps. Bourgeois type. Cloth, 7s. 6d. ; leather, from 10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper cloth, 10s. 6d. ; leather, from 15s. ; interleaved with writing-paper, and bound in leather, from 1 Is. With the Oxford Helps, leather, from 18s. 6d. Printed on writing-paper with wide margins for notes, from 10s. 6d. net. 1 Elementary Helps to the Study of the Bible Oxford Bible for Teachers, containing the texts of the Old and New Testaments, with or without marginal references, and in either the Authorized or Revised Versions, together with the Oxford Helps to the Bible (see below), and 124 full-page plates. In many styles and bindings, from 3s. to 5. A complete list can be obtained from Mr. Henry Frowde, Amen Corner, London, E.C. The Oxford Helps to the Study of the Bible, containing Introductions to the several Books, the History and Antiquities of the Jews, the Natural History of Palestine, with copious tables, concordance and indices, and a series of maps. With 124 full-page plates. 8vo, in long primer type cloth, 5s. ; leather, from 6s. 6d. Bvo, in nonpareil type cloth, 2s. 6d. ; leather, 3s. 6d. 16mo, in pearl type stiff covers, Is. net ; cloth, Is. 6d. ; leather, from 2s. Bible Illustrations, being 124 full-page plates, forming an appendix to the above. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d. Old Testament History narrated for the most part in the words of the Bible. By GEORGE CARTER. With maps. Crown 8vo. 2s. An Annotated Psalter. Arranged by J.M.THOMPSON. FcapSvo. 2s. Dr. Stokoe's Manuals. Crown 8vo Old Testament History for Schools. By T. H. STOKOE. Part I. (Third edition.) From the Creation to the Settlement in Palestine. Part II. From the Settlement to the Disruption. Part III. From the Disruption to the Return from Captivity. Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. each, with maps. Manual of the Four Gospels. With Maps, 3s. 6d. Or, separately, Part I, The Gospel Narrative, 2s. ; Part II, The Gospel Teaching, 2s. Manual of the Acts. 3s. The Life and Letters of St. Paul. 3s. ea. Or, separately, Part I, The Life of St. Paul, 2s. Part II, The Letters of St. Paul, 2s. First Days and Early Letters of the Church. 3s. Or, Part I, First Days of the Church, Is. 6d. Part II, Early Letters of the Church, 2s. Graduated Lessons on the Old Testament. By u. z. RULE, edited by LL. J. M. BEBB. Selected Readings from the O. T. with para- phrases and connecting paragraphs ; with notes for teachers and pupils. For use in lower forms, and in elementary and Sunday Schools. The text is that of the R.V., but the book may be used with the A. V. In three volumes. Extra fcap 8vo. Is. 6d. each in paper covers, or Is. 9d. each in cloth. Vol. I. Creation to Death of Moses. Vol. II. Conquest of Canaan, Psalms, etc. Vol. III. Israel and Judah, the Captivity, the Prophets. The Gospel according to St. Mark. Ed. by A. s. WALPOLE. is.6d. Notes On the Gospel Of St. Luke, for Junior Classes. By Miss E. J. MOORE SMITH. Extra fcap 8vo, stiff covers. Is. 6d. A Greek Testament Primer, being an easy grammar and reading- book for the use of students beginning Greek. By E. MILLER. Second edition. Extra fcap 8vo, paper, 2s. ; cloth, 3s. 6d. History of the Bible List of Editions of the Bible in English, by H. COTTON. Second edition. 8vo. 8s. 6d. RhemeS and Doway ; showing what has been done by Roman Catholics for the diffusion of the Bible in English. By H. COTTON. 8vo. 9s. The Part of Rheims in the Making of the English Bible, by J. G. CARLETON, containing historical and critical introduction, tables and analyses thereof. 8vo. 9s. 6d. net. Bible, portion edited by W. W. SKEAT. See p. 6. Studia Biblica et Ecclesiastica. Essays chiefly in Biblical and Patristic criticism, and kindred subjects. 8vo. Vol. I, 10s. 6d. Vol. II, 12s. 6d. Vol. Ill, 16s. Vol. IV, 12s. 6d. Vol. V, complete, 16s., or, in separate parts, Part I, Life of St. Nino, by M. and J. O. WARDROP. 3s. 6d. Part II, Texts from Mount Athos, by K. LAKE. 3s. 6d. Part III, Place of the Peshitto Version in the Ap- paratus Criticus of the Greek New Testament. 2s. 6d. Part IV, Baptism and Christian Archaeology, by C. F. ROGERS. 4s. 6d. The Gospel of Barnabas. Edited and translated from the Italian MS. in the Imperial Library, Vienna, by LONSDALE and LAURA RAGG. 8vo, with a facsimile. 16s. net. The Journal of Theological Studies. Edited by J. F. BETHUNE- BAKER and F. E. BRIGHTMAN. Published Quarterly, price 3s. 6d. net. Annual subscription 12s. net, post free. Many of the back numbers are still obtainable. The Old Testament and Apocrypha The Psalter, by RICHARD ROLLE of HAMPOLE. Edited by H. R. BRAMLEY. With an introduction and glossary. 8vo. 1 Is. The Parallel Psalter : being the Prayer-Book version of the Psalms and a new version arranged on opposite pages, with an introduction and glossaries by S. R. DRIVER. Second edition. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. net. The Book of Job in the Revised Version. Edited, with introductions and brief annotations, by S. R. DRIVER. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. net. The Hebrew Prophets in the Revised Version. Arranged and annotated by F. H. WOODS and F. E. POWELL. In four vols., crown 8vo. Vol. I (Amos, Hosea, Isaiah i-xxxix, Micah), 2s. 6d. net. Lectures On EcclesiasteS. By G. G. BRADLEY. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d. Israel's Hope of Immortality. By C. F. BURNEY. 8vo. 2s. 6d. net. EcclesiasticUS, translated from the Hebrew by A. E. COWLEY and A. NEUBAUER. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. 3 The Place of Ecelesiasticus in Semitic Literature. An essay by D. S. MARGOLIOUTH. Small 4to. 2s. 6d. The Five Books of Maccabees, with notes and illustrations by H. COTTON. 8vo. 10s. 6d. The Book of Enoch, translated from Dillmann's Ethiopic text (emended and revised), and edited by R. H. CHARLES. 8vo. [Out of print.] The Book of the Secrets Of Enoch, translated from the Slavonic by W. R. MORFILL, and edited, with introduction, notes, etc, by R. H. CHARLES. 8vo. 7s. 6d. History and Song of Deborah (Judges iv and V). By G. A. COOKE. 8vo. Paper covers. Is. 6d. (Published by Mr. Frowde.) Deuterographs. Duplicate passages in the Old Testament. Arranged by R. B. GIRDLESTOXE. 8vo. 7s. 6d. Astronomy in the Old Testament. By G. SCHIAPARELLI. Authorized translation. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. net. Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Latina, cum Paraphrasi Angio- Saxonica. Edidit B. THORPE. 8vo. 10s. 6d. Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Gallica e Cod. MS in Bibi. Bodleiana adservato, una cum Versione Metrica aliisque Monumentis perve- tustis. Nunc primum descripsit et edidit F. MICHEL. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. Chandler's Life of David. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. Faussett's Sacred Chronology. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. Hebrew and Chaldee Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Book of Genesis. By G. J. SPURRELL. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 12s. 6d. Notes On Samuel. By S. R. DRIVER. [Out of print.] Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Books of Kings. By C. F. BURNEY. 8vo. 14s. net. A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, with an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic, based on the Thesaurus and Lexicon of GESENIUS, by F. BROWN, S. R. DRIVER, and C. A. BRIGGS. Small 4to. Cloth, 34s. net ; morocco back, 45s. net. The several Parts can be supplied to complete sets. Gesenius's Hebrew Grammar, as edited and enlarged by E. KAUTZSCH. New edition in preparation. A Treatise on the Use of the Tenses in Hebrew. By S. R. DRIVER. Third edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs, attributed to ABRAHAM IBN EZRA. Edited from a MS in the Bodleian Library by S. R. DRIVER. Crown 8vo. Paper covers, 3s. 6d. 4 The Book of Tobit. A Chaldee Text, from a unique MS in the Bodleian Library ; with other Rabbinical texts, English translations, and the Itala. Edited by A. NEUBAUER. Crown 8vo. 6s. EcclesiastlcUS (xxxix. 15 xlix. 11). The Hebrew, with early versions and English translation, etc, edited by A. E. COWLEY and A. NEUBAUER. With 2 facsimiles. 4to. 10s. 6d. net. Translation, see p. 67. Facsimiles of the Fragments hitherto recovered of the Book of Ecclesiasticus in Hebrew. 60 leaves in Collotype. 1 Is. net. (Published jointly by the Oxford and Cambridge University Presses.) The Psalms in Hebrew without points, stiff covers. 2s. Accentuation of Psalms, Proverbs, and Job. By w. WICKES. 8vo. 5s. Hebrew Prose Accentuation. By the same. 8vo. ios. 6d. Lightfoot's Horae Hebraicae et Talmudicae. A new Edition by R. GANDELL. 4 vols. 8vo. 1 Is. Greek VetUS Testamentum ex Versione Septuaginta Interpretum secundum exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas Codicis Alex- andrini. Tomi III. 18mo. 6s. each volume. A Concordance to the Septuagint and other Greek Versions of the O. T. (including the Apocryphal Books) ; by the late EDWIN HATCH and H. A. REDPATH. With Supplement. ByH. A. REDPATH. Fasc. I, containing a Concordance to the proper names occurring in the Septuagint ; Fasc. II, containing a Concordance to Ecclesiasticus, other Addenda, and the Hebrew Index to the whole work. Imperial 4to. Cloth in 3 vols. 8 -8s. net (or Concordance, 2 vols., 6 17s. 6d. net. Supplement, 2 net). Parts II- VI, 21s. net each ; Supplements I and II, 16s. net each. Origenis Hexaplorum quae SUperSUnt sive Veterum Inter- pretum Graecorum in totum Vetus Testamentum Fragmenta. Edidit F. FIELD. 2 vols. 4to. 5 5s. net. Essays in Biblical Greek. By EDWIN HATCH. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. The Book of Wisdom: the Greek Text, the Latin Vulgate, and the Authorized English Version; with an introduction, critical apparatus, and a commentary. By W. J. DEANE. 4to. 12s. 6d. net. The Greek Versions of the Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs. Edited from nine MSS, with variants from other versions. By R. H. CHARLES. 8vo. 18s. net. Coptic Tattam's Major and Minor Prophets. See p. 85. 5 The New Testament The Parallel New Testament, Greek and English ; being the Authorized Version, 1611 ; the Revised Version, 1881 ; and the Greek Text followed in the Revised Version. 8vo. 9s. net. The New Testament in Greek and English. Edited by E. CARDWELL. 2 vols. 183T. Crown 8vo. 6s. Greek The Greek Testament, with the Readings adopted by the Revisers of the Authorized Version. (1) Pica type. DemySvo. 10s. 6d. (9) Long Primer type. With marginal references. Fcap 8vo. 4s. 6d. (3) The same, on writing-paper, with wide margin, 15s. (4) The same, on India paper. 6s. Novum Testamentum Graece. Accedunt parallela S. Scripturae loca, etc. Ed. C.LLOYD. 18mo. 3s. On writing-paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d. Critical Appendices to the above, by W. SANDAY. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. NoVUm Testamentum Graece (ed. LLOYD), with Sanday's Appen- dices. Cloth, 6s. ; paste grain, 7s. 6d. ; morocco, 10s. 6d. Novum Testamentum Graece juxta Exemplar Millianum. Fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. On writing-paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d. Evangelia Sacra Graece. Fcap 8vo, limp. is. 6d. NoVUm Testamentum Graece. Antiquissimorum Codicum Textus in ordine parallelo dispositi. Edidit E. H. HANSELL. Tomi III. 8vo. 1 4s. Athos Fragments of Codex H of the Pauline Epistles. Photographed and deciphered by KIRSOPP LAKE. Full-size collotype facsimiles, large 4to, in an envelope. 21s. net. Athos Fragments of the Shepherd of Hernias. Photo- graphed and transcribed by KIRSOPP LAKE. Full-size collotype facsimiles, large 4to, in an envelope. 17s. 6d. net. Outlines of the Textual Criticism of the New Testament. By C. E. HAMMOND. Sixth edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d. Greswell's Harmonia Evangelica. Fifthedition. 8vo. 9s. ed. Pro- legomena. 8vo.5s.net. Dissertations on the Harmony. 25s.net Jones's Canon of the New Testament. 8vo. 3 vols. iss. net. DiatCSSaron. Edited by J. WHITE. 3s. 6d. Horae Synopticae. By Sir J. C. HAWKIXS, Bart. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. Dr. Sanday's Books Sacred Sites of the Gospels, with sixty-three full-page illustrations, maps, and plans. 8vo. 13s. 6d. net. Criticism of the Fourth Gospel. 8vo. 7s. ed. net. The Life of Christ in Recent Research. 8vo, with two illustrations. 7s. 6d. net. Presidential AddreSS to the Christian Section of the Congress for the History of Religions, 1908. 8vo. Is. net. 6 The Logia Two Lectures on the ' Sayings of Jesus', delivered at Oxford in 1897, by W. LOCK and W. SANDAY. 8vo. Is. 6d. net. The Oxyrhynchus Logia and the Apocryphal Gospels. By C. TAYLOR. 8vo, paper covers, 2s. 6d. net. The Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, found in 1903 ; with the Sayings called ' Logia ', found in 1897. By C. TAYLOR. 8vo. 2s. net. Published by Mr. Frowde for the Egypt Exploration Fund. By B. P. GRENFELL and A. S. HUNT. AOriA IHXOY, from an early Greek papyrus, with translation and com- mentary. 8vo, stiff boards, with two collotypes, 2s. net; with two tone blocks, 6d. net. New Sayings of Jesus and Fragment of a Lost Gospel. With one Plate. Is. net. Fragment of an Uncanonical Gospel from Oxyrhynchus. With one Plate. Is. net. Coptic and Syriac The Coptic Version of the New Testament, in the Northern Dialect, otherwise called Memphitic and Bohairic. With introduction, critical apparatus, and English translation. 8vo. Vols. I and II. The Gospels. 2 2s. net ; Vols. Ill and IV. The Epistles. 2 2s. net. Tetraeuangelium Sanctum iuxta simplicem Syrorum versionem ad fidem codicum, Massorae, editionum denuo recognitum. Lectionum supel- lectilem quam conquisiverat P. E. PUSEY auxit, digessit, edidit G. H. GWILLIAM. Accedunt capitulorum notatio, concordiarum tabulae, translatio Latina, annotationes. Crown 4to. 2 2s. net. Collatio Cod. Lewisiani Evangeliorum Syriacorum cum Cod. Curetoniano, auctore A. BONUS. Demy 4to. 8s. 6d. net. Latin Old-Latin Biblical Texts : small 4to, stiff covers. No. I. St. Matthew, from the St. Germain MS (g t ). Edited by J. WORDSWORTH. 6s. net. No. II. Portions of St. Mark and St. Matthew, from the Bobbio MS (k), etc. Edited by J. WORDSWORTH, W. SAND AY, and H. J. WHITE. 1 Is. net. No. III. The Four Gospels, from the Munich MS (q), now numbered Lat. 6224. Edited by H. J. WHITE. 12s. 6d. net. No. IV. Portions of the Acts, of the Epistle of St. James, and of the First Epistle of St. Peter, from the Bobbio Palimpsest (s), now numbered Cod. 16 in the Imperial Library at Vienna. Edited by H. J. WHITE. 5s. net. No. V. The Gospels from the Codex Corbeiensis (ff x or ff 2 ) with Fragments of the Catholic Epistles, Acts, and Apocalypse from the Fleury Palimpsest (h). Edited by E. S. BUCHANAN. 12s. 6d. net. Nouum Testamentum Latine, secundum Editionem Sancti Hiero- nymi. Recensuit I. WORDSWORTH, Episcopus Sarisburiensis ; in operis societatem adsumto H. I. WHITE. 4to. Part I (Gospels), 2 12s. 6d. (Some of the fasciculi of Part I can still be obtained separately.) Part II, fasc. i (Romans), in the press. Part III, fasc. i (Acts\ 12s. 6d. Notes on the Early History of the Vulgate Gospels. By Dom JOHN CHAPMAN, O.S.B. 8vo. 16s.net. Gothic Sacrorum Evangeliorum Versio Gothica cum interpretatione Latina et annotationibus ERICI BENZELII edidit EDWARDUS LYE (1750). Large 4to. 1 10s. net. 7 The Fathers of the Church and Ecclesiastical History Editions with Latin Commentaries Catenae GraeCOrum Patrum in Novum Testamentum edidit J. A. CRAMER. Tomi VIII. 8vo. 2 8s. net. ClementlS Alexandrini Opera, ex rec. GUIL. DINDORFII. Tomi IV. 8vo. 3 net. Cyrilli Archieplscopi Alexandrini in XII Prophetas edidit P. E. PUSEY. Tomi II. 8vo. 2 2s. In D. Joannis Evangeliura. Accedunt Fragmenta Varia. Edidit post Aubertum P. E. PUSEY. Tomi III. 8vo. 2 5s. Commentarii in Lucae Evangelium quae supersunt Syriace edidit R. PAYNE SMITH. 4to. 1 2s. Translation, 2 vols. 8vo. 14s. Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae, Balaei aliorumque Opera Selecta. See p. 85. Eusebii Opera recensuit T. GAISFORD. Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV. Tomi IV. 8vo. 42s. net. Evangelicae Demonstrationis Libri X. Tomi II. 8vo. 15s. Contra Hieroclem et Marcellum Libri. 8vo. 7s. Annotationes Variorum. Tomi II. 8vo. 17s. Canon MuratorianuS. Edited, with notes and facsimile, by S. P. TREGELLES. 4to. 10s. 6d. Historia Ecclesiastica, ex rec. H. VALESII. 8vo. 4s. .T 1. Josephl de bello Judaico Libri Septem recensuit E. CARDWELL. Tomi II. 8vo. 17s. Philosophumena; sive omnium Haeresium Refutatio e Codice Parisino nunc primum edidit EMMANUEL MILLER. 8vo. 10s. Patrum ApOStolicoriim dementis Romani, Ignatii, Polycarpi, quae supersunt edidit G. JACOBSON. Tomi II. Fourth edition. 8vo. 1 Is. Reliquiae Sacrae secundi tertiique saeculi recensuit M. J. ROUTH. Tomi V. Second edition, 1846. 8vo. 1 5s. net. Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Opuscula recensuit M. J. ROUTH. Tomi II. Third edition, 1858. 8vo. 10s. Socratis Scholastic! Historia Ecclesiastica Gr. et Lat. edidit R. HUSSEY. Tomi III. 1853. 8vo. 15s. net. Historia Ecclesiastica edidit R. HUSSEY. Tomi III. 8vo. 15s. net. Theodoretl Ecclesiasticae Historiae Libri V rec. T. GAISFORD. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. Graecarum Affectionum Curatio rec. T. GAISFORD. 8vo, 7s. 6d. Notitia Scriptorum SS. Patrum. By J. G. BOWLING. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. 8 Editions with English Commentaries or Introductions St. AthanaSlUS. Orations against the Arians. With an account of his Life by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo. 9s. Historical Writings, according to the Benedictine Text. With an introduction by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. St. AugUStine. Select Anti-Pelagian Treatises, and the Acts of the Second Council of Orange. With introduction by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo. [Out of print.] St. Basil : on the Holy Spirit. Revised text, with notes and introduction, by C. F. H. JOHNSTON. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Barnabas, Editio Princeps of the Epistle of, by Archbishop Ussher, as printed at Oxford, A. D. 1642. With a dissertation by J. H. BACKHOUSE. Small 4to. 3s. 6d. Canons of the First Four General Councils of Nicaea, Con- stantinople, Ephesus, and Chalcedon. With notes by W. BRIGHT. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Eusebius' Ecclesiastical History, according to Burton's text, with introduction by W. BRIGHT. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d. Eusebii Pamphili Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV. Revised text edited, with introduction, notes, English translation, and indices, by E. H. GIFFORD. 4 vols. [Vols. I, II, text, with critical notes. Vol. Ill, in two parts, translation. Vol. IV, notes and indices.] 8vo. 5 5s. net. (Vol. Ill, divided into two parts, containing the translation, 1 5s. net.) The Bodleian Manuscript of Jerome's Version of the Chronicles Of Eusebius, reproduced in collotype, with an intro- duction by J. K. FOTHERINGHAM. 4to, buckram. 2 10s. net. John of EpheSUS. Seep. 85. Translation, by R.PAYNE SMITH. 8vo. 10s. Philo : about the Contemplative Life ; or, the Fourth Book of the Treatise concerning Virtues. Edited, with a defence of its genuineness, by F. C. CONYBEARE. With a facsimile. 8vo. 14s. net. Socrates' Ecclesiastical History, according to Hussey's Text, with introduction by W. BRIGHT. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Tertulliani Apologeticus adversus Gentes pro Christianis. Edited by T. H. BINDLEY. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. De Praescriptione Haereticorum : ad Martyras : ad Scapulara. Edited by T. H. BINDLEY. Crown 8vo. 5s. net. Works of the English Divines. 8vo Sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries Editions of Hooker and Butler Hooker's Works, with Walton's Life, arranged by JOHN KEBLE. Seventh edition, revised by R. W. CHURCH and F. PAGET. 3 vols. 12s. each. [Vol. II contains the Fifth Book.] Introduction to Hooker's Ecclesiastical Polity, Book V. By F. PAGET. Second edition. 5s. net. The Text, as arranged by J. KEBLE. 2 vols. 11s. The Works Of Bishop Butler. By W. E. GLADSTONE. 2 vols. 14s. each. Crown 8vo, Vol. I, Analogy, 5s. 6d. ; Vol. II, Sermons, 5s. Studies subsidiary to the AVorks of Bishop Butler. Uniform with the above. 10s. 6d. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. PEARsoN'sExposmoNOFTHECREED. Revised by E. Burton. Sixth edition. 10s. 6d. MINOR THEOLOGICAL WORKS. Edited by E. Churton. 2 vols. 10s. ENCHIRIDION THEOLOGICUM ANTI-ROMANUM. I. JEREMY TAYLOR'S Dissuasive from Popery, and Real Presence. 8s. II. BARROW'S Supremacy of the Pope, and Unity of the Church. 7s. 6d. III. Tracts by WAKE, PATRICK, STILLINGFLEET, CLAGETT, and others. 11s. ADDISON'S EVIDENCES. 3s. 6d. net. ALLIX'S WORKS. 4 vols. 5s. each. BENTLEY'S SERMONS. 4s. BISCOE'S HISTORY OF THE ACTS. 9s. 6d. BRAGG E'S WORKS. 5 vols. 1 12s. 6d. BULL'S WORKS, with NELSON'S Life. Ed. by E. Burton. 8 vols. 2 9s. BURNET'S EXPOSITION OF THE XXXIX ARTICLES. 7s. BUTLER'S WORKS, 1849. 2 vols. Sermons. 5s. 6d. Analogy. 5s. 6d. CLERGYMAN'S INSTRUCTOR. Sixth edition. 6s. 6d. COMBER'S WORKS. 7 vols. 1 11s. 6d. FELL'S PARAPHRASE ON ST. PAUL'S EPISTLES. 7s. FLEETWOOD'S WORKS. 3 vols. 1 Is. 6d. HALL'S WORKS. Edited by P. Wynter. 10 vols. 3 3s. HAMMOND'S PARAPHRASE ON THE NEW TESTAMENT. 4 vols. 20s. PARAPHRASE ON THE PSALMS. 4 vols. 20s. HORBERY'S WORKS. 2 vols. 8s. HOOPER'S WORKS. 2 vols. 8s. JACKSON'S (DR. THOMAS) WORKS. 12 vols. 3 6s. JEWEL'S WORKS. Edited by R. W. Jelf. 8 vols. 1 10s. LESLIE'S WORKS. 7 vols. 40s. LEWIS' (JOHN) LIFE OF WICLIF. 5s. 6d. LIFE OF PECOCK. 3s. 6d. LEWIS' (THOMAS) ORIGINES HEBRAICAE. 3 vols. 16s. 6d. NEWCOMBE'S OBSERVATIONS. 6s. net. PATRICK'S THEOLOGICAL WORKS. 9 vols. 1 Is. SANDERSON'S WORKS. Edited by W. Jacobson. 6 vols. 1 10s. SCOTT'S WORKS. 6 vols. 1 7s. SMALRIDGE'S SERMONS. 2 vols. 8s. SHERLOCK'S DISCOURSES. 4 vols. 42s. net. STILLINGFLEET'S ORIGINES SACRAE. 2 vols. 9s. GROUNDS OF PROTESTANT RELIGION. 2 vols. 10s. STANHOPE'S PARAPHRASE. 2 vols. 10s. TAVERNER'S POSTILS. 5s. 6d. WALL'S HISTORY OF INFANT BAPTISM. By H. Cotton. 2 vols. 1 Is. WATERLAND'S WORKS, with Life by Van Mildert. 6 vols. 2 11s. DOCTRINE OF THE EUCHARIST. 3rd ed. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d. WHEATLEY'S ILLUSTRATION OF THE BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER. 5s. 10 Early Ecclesiastical History The New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers. By a Com- mittee of the Oxford Society of Historical Theology. 8vo. 6s. net. The Origins of Christianity. By C. BIGG. Edited by T. B. STRONG. 8vo. 12s. 6d. net. The Church's Task under the Empire, with preface, notes, and excursus, by C. BIGG. 8vo. 5s. net. Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, and other Works. 10 vols. 8vo. 3 3s. The Church in the Apostolic Age. By W. W. SHIRLEY. Second edition. Fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. Harmonia Symbolica: Creeds of the Western Church. By C. HEURTLEY. 8vo. 6s. 6d. A Critical Dissertation on the Athanasian Creed. By G. D. W. OMMANXEY. 8vo. 16s. Ecclesiae Occidentalis Monumenta luris Antiquissima : Canonum et Conciliorum Graecorum Interpretationes Latinae. Edidit C. H. TURNER. 4to, stiff covers. Tom. I, Fasc. I, pars I, 10s. 6d. net; pars II, 21s. net. Tom. II, pars I, 18s. net. The Key Of Truth : being a Manual of the Paulician Church of Armenia. By F. C. CONYBEARE. 8vo. 15s. net. Baptism and Christian Archaeology, being an offprint of studia Biblica, Vol. V. By C. F. ROGERS. 8vo. 5s. net. Ecclesiastical History of Britain, etc Sources Vita S. Columbae. Edited, with introduction, notes, and glossary, by J. T. FOWLER. Crown 8vo, leather back. 8s. 6d. net. With translation, 9s. 6d. net. Baedae Opera Historica. Edited by C. PLUMMER. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 21s. net. Councils and Ecclesiastical Documents relating to Great Britain and Ireland. Edited after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W. HADDAN and W. STUBBS. Medium 8vo. Vols. I-III, 3 13s. 6d. net. Also Vol. II (Parts I and II) and Vol. Ill, separately, 14s. net per volume. Nova Legenda Angliae, as collected by John of Tynemouth and others, and first printed 1516. Re-edited 1902 by C. HORSTMAN. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 16s. net. Wyclif. A Catalogue of the Works. By W. W. SHIRLEY. 8vo. 3s. 6d. Select English Works. By T. ARNOLD. 3 vols. 8vo. 1 Is. net. Trialogus. First edited by G. LECHLER. 8vo. 7s. Cranmer's Works. Collected by H. JENKYNS. 4 vols. 8vo. 1 10s. ' Cranmer's ' Catechism with the Latin Original. Edited by EDWARD BURTOX (1829). 8vo, with woodcuts. 7s. 6d. net. n Records of the Reformation. The Divorce, 1527-1533. Mostly now for the first time printed. Collected and arranged by N. POCOCK. 2 vols. 1 16s. Primers put forth in the reign of Henry VIII. 8vo. 5s. The Reformation of Ecclesiastical Laws, as attempted in the reigns of Henry VIII, Edward VI, and Elizabeth. Edited by E. CARD WELL. 8vo. 6s. 6d. Conferences on the Book of Common Prayer from 1551 to 1690. Edited by E. CARDAVELL. Third edition. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net. Documentary Annals of the Reformed Church of England; Injunctions, Declarations, Orders, Articles of Inquiry, etc, from 1546 to 1716. Collected by E. CARDWELL. 2 vols. 8vo. 25s.net. Formularies of Faith set forth by the King's authority during Henry VIII's reign. 8vo. 7s. Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. By J. GRIFFITHS. 8vo. 7s. 6d. Hamilton's Catechism, 1552. Edited, with introduction and glossary, by T. G. LAW. With a Preface by W. E. GLADSTONE. 8vo. 12s. 6d. Noelli CatechisniUS sive prima institutiodisciplinaquePietatisChristianae Latine explicata. Editio nova cura G. JACOBSON. 8vo. 5s. 6d. Sylloge Confessionum sub tempus Reformandae Ecclesiae edit. Subjic. Catechismus Heidelbergensis et Canones Synodi Dordrecht. 8vo. 8s. Histories written in the seventeenth (or early eighteenth) and edited in the nineteenth century Stillingfleet's Origines Britannicae, with LLOYD'S Historical Account of Church Government. Edited by T. P. PANTIN. 2 vols. 8vo. 10s. Inett's Origines Anglicanae (in continuation of Stillingfleet). Edited by J. GRIFFITHS. 1855. 3 vols. 8vo. 15s. Fuller's Church History of Britain. Edited by J. s. BREWER. 1845. 6 vols. 8vo. 2 12s. 6d. net. Le Neve's Fasti Ecclesiae Anglicanae. Corrected and con- tinued from 1715 to 1853 by T. D. HARDY. 3 vols. 8vo. 1 10s. net. Strype's Memorials of Cranmer. 2 vols. 8vo. us. net. Life of Aylmer. 8vo. 5s. 6d. net. Life of Whitgift. 3 vols. 8vo. 16s. 6d. net. General Index. 2 vols. 8vo. lls.net. Burnet's History of the Reformation. Revised by N. POCOCK. 7 vols. 8vo. 1 10s. Prideaux's Connection of Sacred and Profane History. 2 vols. 8vo. 10s. Shuckford's Continuation, 10s. Gibson's SynoduS Anglicana. Edited by E. CARDWELL. 1854. 8vo. 6s. 12 Recent Works in English Ecclesiastical History History of the Church of England from the abolition of the Roman Jurisdiction. By W. R. DIXON. 3rd edition. 6 vols. 8vo. 16s. per vol. Chapters of Early English Church History. By w. BRIGHT. Third edition. With a map. 8vo. 12s. Registrum Sacrum Anglicanum : an attempt to exhibit the course of Episcopal Succession in England. By W. STUBBS. 2nd ed. 4to. 10s. 6d. The Elizabethan Clergy and the Settlement of Religion, 1558-1564. By HENRY GEE. With illustrative documents and lists. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. Liturgiology Liturgies, Eastern and Western. Vol. I. Eastern Liturgies. Edited, with introductions and appendices, by F. E. BRIGHTMAN, on the basis of a work by C. E. HAMMOND. 8vo. 1 Is. net. Rituale Armenorum I the Administration of the Sacraments and the Breviary Rites of the Armenian Church, with the Greek Rites of Baptism and Epiphany. Edited by F. C. CONYBEARE; with the East Syrian Epiphany Rites, translated by A. J. MACLEAN. 8vo. 21s. net. CardwelTs Two Books of Common Prayer. Ed. 3. 8vo. 7s.net. Gelasian Sacramentaiy, Liber Sacramentorum Romanae Ecclesiae. Edited by H. A. WILSON. Medium 8vo. 18s. net. Leofric Missal, with some account of the Red Book of Derby, the Missal of Robert of Jumieges, etc. Edited by F. E. WARREN. 4to. 1 10s. net. Ancient Liturgy of the Church of England, according to the Uses of Sarum, York, Hereford, and Bangor, and the Roman Liturgy arranged in parallel columns. By W. MASKELL. 8vo. 15s. net. Monumenta Ritualia Ecclesiae Anglicanae : the occasional Offices of the Church of England according to the old Use of Salisbury, the Prymer in English, and other prayers and forms, with dissertations and notes. By the same. Second edition. Three volumes. 8vo. 2 10s. net. The Liturgy and Ritual of the Celtic Church. By F. E. WAHREN. 8vo. 16s. net. Sharp on the Rubric. 8vo. 6s/ net. Helps to the Study of the Book of Common Prayer. By W. R. W. STEPHENS. Crown 8vo. Cloth, 2s. 6d. net ; also in leather bindings. Printed on Oxford India paper and bound with the Prayer Book, from 11s. 6d. The Oxford Hymn Book Music Edition. Crown 8vo, Ss. 6d. net ; gilt edges, 4s. net ; India paper, 5s. net. Words Only. Crown 8vo, Is. 6d. net ; gilt edges, 2s. net ; India paper, 3s. net. 32mo, cut flush, 6d. net ; cloth boards; 9d. net ; India paper, 2s. net. 13 PHILOSOPHY Ancient Philosophy (For editions, translations, &c., see pages 44-47) Greek Theories of Elementary Cognition from Aicmaeon to Aristotle. By J. I. BEARE. 12s. 6d. net Plato's Doctrine Of Ideas. By J. A. STEWART. 8vo. 6s. net. Mediaeval and Modern Philosophy Opera hactenus inedita Rogeri Baconi. Edited by ROBERT STEELE. 8vo. Fasc. I, De Viciis Contractis in Studio Theologie. os. net. Fasc. II, Communium Naturalium Lib. I. 10s. 6d. net. loannis Saresberiensis Policratici Libri vm recognovit com- mentario etc instruxit C. C. J. WEBB. Two volumes. 8vo. 36s. net. Bacon's NoVUm Organum, edited, with introduction, notes, etc, by T. FOWLER. Second edition. 8vo. 15s. NoVUm Organum, edited by G. W. KITCHIN. 8vo. 9s. 6d. Bentham's Introduction to the Principles of Morals and Legislation. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d. The Works of George Berkeley, formerly Bishop of Cloyne. With prefaces, annotations, appendices, and an account of his Life and Philosophy, by A. C. FRASER. New edition (1901) in crown 8vo. Four volumes. 1 4s. Some copies of the 8vo edition of the Life are still on sale, price 16s. Selections from Berkeley, with introduction and notes, for the use of Students. By the same Editor. Fifth edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. The Cambridge PlatonistS : being selections from their Writings, with introduction by E. T. CAMPAGNAC. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d. net. Leibniz's Monadology and other Philosophical Writings, translated, with introduction and notes, by R. LATTA. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d. Locke's Essay. Collated and annotated with prolegomena, biographical, critical, and historical, by A. C. FRASER. Two volumes. 8vo. 1 12s. Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited byT. FOWLER. Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. A Study in the Ethics of Spinoza. By H. H. JOACHIM. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net. Hume's Treatise of Human Nature. Edited by L. A. SELBY- BIGGE. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 6s. net. Hume's Enquiries. Edited by L. A. SELBY-BIGGE. Crown 8vo. Second edition. 6s. net. British Moralists, being Selections from writers principally of the eighteenth century. Edited by L. A. SELBY-BIGGE. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 12s. net. Uniform with Hume's and Berkeley's Works. Butler's Works, edited by W. E. GLADSTONE. Two volumes. Medium 8vo or Crown 8vo Vol. I (Analogy) 14s. or 5s. 6d, Vol. II (Sermons) 14s. or os. The Optimism of Butler's Analogy. The Romanes Lecture, 1908. By HENRY SCOTT-HOLLAND. 2s. net. 14 Recent Philosophy Kant's Theory Of Knowledge. By H. A.PRICHARD. 8vo. 6s. 6d. net. The Logic of Hegel, translated from the Encyclopaedia of the Philo- sophical Sciences, with Prolegomena, by W. WALLACE. Second edition. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. each. Hegel's Philosophy of Mind, translated, with five introductory essays, by W. WALLACE. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. Lotze's Logic, in Three Books of Thought, of Investigation, and of Knowledge. Translated by B. BOSANQUET. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 12s. Lotze's Metaphysic, in Three Books Ontology, Cosmology, and Psychology. Translated by B. BOSANUUET. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 12s. BluntSChli's Theory Of the State. Translated from the sixth German edition. Third edition, 1901. Crown 8vo, half-bound, 8s. 6d. Green's Prolegomena to Ethics. Edited by A. C.BRADLEY. Fifth edition, 1906. With a Preface by E. CAIRD. Crown 8vo. 6s. net. Types Of Ethical Theory, by J. MARTINEAU. Third edition. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 15s. A Study of Religion : its Sources and Contents. By the same author. Second edition. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 15s. The Principles Of Morals. By T. FOWLER and J. M. WILSON. 8vo. 14s. Also, separately Part I, 3s. 6d. Part II, 10s. 6d. Logic ; or, The Morphology of Knowledge. By B. BOSANQUET. Two volumes. 8vo. 1 Is. net. Lectures and Essays on Natural Theology and Ethics. By W. WALLACE. Edited by E. CAIRD. With portrait. 8vo. 12s. 6d. Studies in History and Jurisprudence. By Rt. Hon. J. BRYCE. 1901. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 5s. net. The Theory Of Good and Evil. By H. RASHDALL. 8vo. 2 vols. 14s. net. The Herbert Spencer Lectures. 8vo. 1905, by FREDERIC HARRISON. 2s.net. 1906. The Voluntary 1st Creed. By AUBERON HERBERT. 2s.net. 1907. Probability, the Foundation of Eugenics. By FRANCIS GALTON. Is. net. 1908. Individualism and After. By BENJAMIN KIDD. Is. net. An Introduction tO Logic. By H.W. B. JOSEPH. 8vo. 9s. 6d. net. Essay On Truth. By H. H. JOACHIM. 8vo. 6s. net. The Ethical Aspects Of Evolution. By W. BENETT. 6s. net. Elementary Logic The Elements of Deductive Logic. By T. FOWLER. Tenth edition, with a collection of examples. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. The Elements of Inductive Logic. By the same. Sixth edition. Extra fcap 8vo. 6s. In one volume with Deductive Logic, 7s. 6d. 15 ORIENTAL LANGUAGES See also Anecdota Oxoniensia, pp. 98, 99. Sacred Books of the East Translated by various Scholars, and edited by the late Right Hon. F. MAX MULLER. Forty-nine volumes An Index Volume (Vol. L) is in the press. Sacred Books of India. Brahmanism Twenty-one volumes Vedic Hymns, Part I, translated by F. MAX MULLER. Part II, translated by H. OLDENBERG. Two volumes (XXXII, XLVI). 18s. 6d. net and 14s. net. HymnS Of the Atharva-Veda, translated by M. BLOOMFIELD. One volume (XLII). 21s. net. The xS'atapatha-BrahmaTZa, translated by JULIUS EGGELING. Five volumes (XII, XXVI, XLI, XLIII), 12s. 6d. net each ; (XLIV), 18s. 6d. net. The Gn'hya- Sutras, translated by H. OLDENBERG. ^ Two volumes (XXIX, XXX), each 12s. 6d. net. The Upanishads, translated by F. MAX MULLER. Two volumes (I, XV Second edition), each 10s. 6d. net. The Bhagavadglta, translated by KASHINATH TRIMBAK TELANG. One volume (VIII), with the Sanatsu^atiya and Anugita. 10s. 6d. net. The Vedanta- Sutras, with Ankara's Commentary, by G. THIBAUT. Two volumes (XXXIV, XXXVIII), each 12s. 6d. net. The third volume (XLVIII) with Ramanu^a's ribhashya. 25s. net. Vol. XXXI V Part I of the Vedanta-Sutras is temporarily out of print. The Sacred LaWS of the AryaS, translated by G. BUHLER. Two volumes (II (Second edition) and XIV), each 10s. 6d. net. The Institutes Of Vishmi, translated by JULIUS JOLLY. One volume (VII). 10s. 6d. net. Manu, translated by GEORG BUHLER. One volume (XXV). 21s. net. The Minor Law-books, translated by JULIUS JOLLY. * One volume (XXXIII, Narada, BHhaspati). 10s. 6d. net. Jainism and Buddhism. Twelve volumes The Gaina- Sutras, translated from Prakrit by H. JACOBI. Two volumes (XXII, XLV). 10s. 6d. net and 12s. 6d. net. The Saddharma-pUT^arika, translated from Sanskrit by H. KERN. One volume (XXI). 12s. 6d. net. Mahayana Texts, by E. B. COWELL, F. MAX MULLER, and J. TAKAKUSU. One volume (XLIX). From the Sanskrit. 12s. 6d. net. The Dhammapada and Sutta-Nipata, translated by F. MAX MULLER and V. FAUSBOLL. One vol. (X, Ed. 2). From the Pali. 10s.6d.net. Buddhist SuttaS, translated from the Pali by T. W. RHYS DAVIDS. One volume (XI). 10s. 6d. net. 16 RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date DUE AS STAMPED BELOW JAN 3 01995 SEP 5 1995 OCTi FEB082 20,000 (4/94) _J YC 101567 240097 H3